1 //===- SimplifyCFG.cpp - Code to perform CFG simplification ---------------===//
2 //
3 // Part of the LLVM Project, under the Apache License v2.0 with LLVM Exceptions.
4 // See https://llvm.org/LICENSE.txt for license information.
5 // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0 WITH LLVM-exception
6 //
7 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
8 //
9 // Peephole optimize the CFG.
10 //
11 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
12 
13 #include "llvm/ADT/APInt.h"
14 #include "llvm/ADT/ArrayRef.h"
15 #include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
16 #include "llvm/ADT/MapVector.h"
17 #include "llvm/ADT/Optional.h"
18 #include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h"
19 #include "llvm/ADT/ScopeExit.h"
20 #include "llvm/ADT/Sequence.h"
21 #include "llvm/ADT/SetOperations.h"
22 #include "llvm/ADT/SetVector.h"
23 #include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
24 #include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
25 #include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h"
26 #include "llvm/ADT/StringRef.h"
27 #include "llvm/Analysis/AssumptionCache.h"
28 #include "llvm/Analysis/ConstantFolding.h"
29 #include "llvm/Analysis/EHPersonalities.h"
30 #include "llvm/Analysis/GuardUtils.h"
31 #include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h"
32 #include "llvm/Analysis/MemorySSA.h"
33 #include "llvm/Analysis/MemorySSAUpdater.h"
34 #include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h"
35 #include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h"
36 #include "llvm/IR/Attributes.h"
37 #include "llvm/IR/BasicBlock.h"
38 #include "llvm/IR/CFG.h"
39 #include "llvm/IR/Constant.h"
40 #include "llvm/IR/ConstantRange.h"
41 #include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
42 #include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
43 #include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
44 #include "llvm/IR/Function.h"
45 #include "llvm/IR/GlobalValue.h"
46 #include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h"
47 #include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
48 #include "llvm/IR/InstrTypes.h"
49 #include "llvm/IR/Instruction.h"
50 #include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
51 #include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
52 #include "llvm/IR/Intrinsics.h"
53 #include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h"
54 #include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h"
55 #include "llvm/IR/Metadata.h"
56 #include "llvm/IR/Module.h"
57 #include "llvm/IR/NoFolder.h"
58 #include "llvm/IR/Operator.h"
59 #include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h"
60 #include "llvm/IR/PseudoProbe.h"
61 #include "llvm/IR/Type.h"
62 #include "llvm/IR/Use.h"
63 #include "llvm/IR/User.h"
64 #include "llvm/IR/Value.h"
65 #include "llvm/IR/ValueHandle.h"
66 #include "llvm/Support/BranchProbability.h"
67 #include "llvm/Support/Casting.h"
68 #include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
69 #include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
70 #include "llvm/Support/ErrorHandling.h"
71 #include "llvm/Support/KnownBits.h"
72 #include "llvm/Support/MathExtras.h"
73 #include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
74 #include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
75 #include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
76 #include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/SSAUpdater.h"
77 #include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/ValueMapper.h"
78 #include <algorithm>
79 #include <cassert>
80 #include <climits>
81 #include <cstddef>
82 #include <cstdint>
83 #include <iterator>
84 #include <map>
85 #include <set>
86 #include <tuple>
87 #include <utility>
88 #include <vector>
89 
90 using namespace llvm;
91 using namespace PatternMatch;
92 
93 #define DEBUG_TYPE "simplifycfg"
94 
95 cl::opt<bool> llvm::RequireAndPreserveDomTree(
96     "simplifycfg-require-and-preserve-domtree", cl::Hidden, cl::ZeroOrMore,
97     cl::init(false),
98     cl::desc("Temorary development switch used to gradually uplift SimplifyCFG "
99              "into preserving DomTree,"));
100 
101 // Chosen as 2 so as to be cheap, but still to have enough power to fold
102 // a select, so the "clamp" idiom (of a min followed by a max) will be caught.
103 // To catch this, we need to fold a compare and a select, hence '2' being the
104 // minimum reasonable default.
105 static cl::opt<unsigned> PHINodeFoldingThreshold(
106     "phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(2),
107     cl::desc(
108         "Control the amount of phi node folding to perform (default = 2)"));
109 
110 static cl::opt<unsigned> TwoEntryPHINodeFoldingThreshold(
111     "two-entry-phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(4),
112     cl::desc("Control the maximal total instruction cost that we are willing "
113              "to speculatively execute to fold a 2-entry PHI node into a "
114              "select (default = 4)"));
115 
116 static cl::opt<bool> DupRet(
117     "simplifycfg-dup-ret", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
118     cl::desc("Duplicate return instructions into unconditional branches"));
119 
120 static cl::opt<bool>
121     HoistCommon("simplifycfg-hoist-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
122                 cl::desc("Hoist common instructions up to the parent block"));
123 
124 static cl::opt<bool>
125     SinkCommon("simplifycfg-sink-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
126                cl::desc("Sink common instructions down to the end block"));
127 
128 static cl::opt<bool> HoistCondStores(
129     "simplifycfg-hoist-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
130     cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores if an unconditional store precedes"));
131 
132 static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStores(
133     "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
134     cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores even if an unconditional store does not "
135              "precede - hoist multiple conditional stores into a single "
136              "predicated store"));
137 
138 static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStoresAggressively(
139     "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores-aggressively", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
140     cl::desc("When merging conditional stores, do so even if the resultant "
141              "basic blocks are unlikely to be if-converted as a result"));
142 
143 static cl::opt<bool> SpeculateOneExpensiveInst(
144     "speculate-one-expensive-inst", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
145     cl::desc("Allow exactly one expensive instruction to be speculatively "
146              "executed"));
147 
148 static cl::opt<unsigned> MaxSpeculationDepth(
149     "max-speculation-depth", cl::Hidden, cl::init(10),
150     cl::desc("Limit maximum recursion depth when calculating costs of "
151              "speculatively executed instructions"));
152 
153 static cl::opt<int>
154     MaxSmallBlockSize("simplifycfg-max-small-block-size", cl::Hidden,
155                       cl::init(10),
156                       cl::desc("Max size of a block which is still considered "
157                                "small enough to thread through"));
158 
159 // Two is chosen to allow one negation and a logical combine.
160 static cl::opt<unsigned>
161     BranchFoldThreshold("simplifycfg-branch-fold-threshold", cl::Hidden,
162                         cl::init(2),
163                         cl::desc("Maximum cost of combining conditions when "
164                                  "folding branches"));
165 
166 STATISTIC(NumBitMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into bitmaps");
167 STATISTIC(NumLinearMaps,
168           "Number of switch instructions turned into linear mapping");
169 STATISTIC(NumLookupTables,
170           "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables");
171 STATISTIC(
172     NumLookupTablesHoles,
173     "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables (holes checked)");
174 STATISTIC(NumTableCmpReuses, "Number of reused switch table lookup compares");
175 STATISTIC(NumFoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors,
176           "Number of value comparisons folded into predecessor basic blocks");
177 STATISTIC(NumFoldBranchToCommonDest,
178           "Number of branches folded into predecessor basic block");
179 STATISTIC(
180     NumHoistCommonCode,
181     "Number of common instruction 'blocks' hoisted up to the begin block");
182 STATISTIC(NumHoistCommonInstrs,
183           "Number of common instructions hoisted up to the begin block");
184 STATISTIC(NumSinkCommonCode,
185           "Number of common instruction 'blocks' sunk down to the end block");
186 STATISTIC(NumSinkCommonInstrs,
187           "Number of common instructions sunk down to the end block");
188 STATISTIC(NumSpeculations, "Number of speculative executed instructions");
189 STATISTIC(NumInvokes,
190           "Number of invokes with empty resume blocks simplified into calls");
191 
192 namespace {
193 
194 // The first field contains the value that the switch produces when a certain
195 // case group is selected, and the second field is a vector containing the
196 // cases composing the case group.
197 using SwitchCaseResultVectorTy =
198     SmallVector<std::pair<Constant *, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>>, 2>;
199 
200 // The first field contains the phi node that generates a result of the switch
201 // and the second field contains the value generated for a certain case in the
202 // switch for that PHI.
203 using SwitchCaseResultsTy = SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4>;
204 
205 /// ValueEqualityComparisonCase - Represents a case of a switch.
206 struct ValueEqualityComparisonCase {
207   ConstantInt *Value;
208   BasicBlock *Dest;
209 
210   ValueEqualityComparisonCase(ConstantInt *Value, BasicBlock *Dest)
211       : Value(Value), Dest(Dest) {}
212 
213   bool operator<(ValueEqualityComparisonCase RHS) const {
214     // Comparing pointers is ok as we only rely on the order for uniquing.
215     return Value < RHS.Value;
216   }
217 
218   bool operator==(BasicBlock *RHSDest) const { return Dest == RHSDest; }
219 };
220 
221 class SimplifyCFGOpt {
222   const TargetTransformInfo &TTI;
223   DomTreeUpdater *DTU;
224   const DataLayout &DL;
225   ArrayRef<WeakVH> LoopHeaders;
226   const SimplifyCFGOptions &Options;
227   bool Resimplify;
228 
229   Value *isValueEqualityComparison(Instruction *TI);
230   BasicBlock *GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
231       Instruction *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases);
232   bool SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(Instruction *TI,
233                                                      BasicBlock *Pred,
234                                                      IRBuilder<> &Builder);
235   bool PerformValueComparisonIntoPredecessorFolding(Instruction *TI, Value *&CV,
236                                                     Instruction *PTI,
237                                                     IRBuilder<> &Builder);
238   bool FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(Instruction *TI,
239                                            IRBuilder<> &Builder);
240 
241   bool simplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
242   bool simplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
243   bool simplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI);
244   bool simplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI);
245   bool simplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI);
246   bool simplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI);
247   bool simplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
248   bool simplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI);
249   bool simplifyBranch(BranchInst *Branch, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
250   bool simplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
251   bool simplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
252   bool SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
253 
254   bool tryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICmpInst *ICI,
255                                              IRBuilder<> &Builder);
256 
257   bool HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
258                              bool EqTermsOnly);
259   bool SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
260                               const TargetTransformInfo &TTI);
261   bool SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(Instruction *OldTerm, Value *Cond,
262                                   BasicBlock *TrueBB, BasicBlock *FalseBB,
263                                   uint32_t TrueWeight, uint32_t FalseWeight);
264   bool SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
265                                  const DataLayout &DL);
266   bool SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI, SelectInst *Select);
267   bool SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI, SelectInst *SI);
268   bool TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
269 
270 public:
271   SimplifyCFGOpt(const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, DomTreeUpdater *DTU,
272                  const DataLayout &DL, ArrayRef<WeakVH> LoopHeaders,
273                  const SimplifyCFGOptions &Opts)
274       : TTI(TTI), DTU(DTU), DL(DL), LoopHeaders(LoopHeaders), Options(Opts) {
275     assert((!DTU || !DTU->hasPostDomTree()) &&
276            "SimplifyCFG is not yet capable of maintaining validity of a "
277            "PostDomTree, so don't ask for it.");
278   }
279 
280   bool simplifyOnce(BasicBlock *BB);
281   bool simplifyOnceImpl(BasicBlock *BB);
282   bool run(BasicBlock *BB);
283 
284   // Helper to set Resimplify and return change indication.
285   bool requestResimplify() {
286     Resimplify = true;
287     return true;
288   }
289 };
290 
291 } // end anonymous namespace
292 
293 /// Return true if it is safe to merge these two
294 /// terminator instructions together.
295 static bool
296 SafeToMergeTerminators(Instruction *SI1, Instruction *SI2,
297                        SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 4> *FailBlocks = nullptr) {
298   if (SI1 == SI2)
299     return false; // Can't merge with self!
300 
301   // It is not safe to merge these two switch instructions if they have a common
302   // successor, and if that successor has a PHI node, and if *that* PHI node has
303   // conflicting incoming values from the two switch blocks.
304   BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
305   BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
306 
307   SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
308   bool Fail = false;
309   for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
310     if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
311       for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
312         PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
313         if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) !=
314             PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)) {
315           if (FailBlocks)
316             FailBlocks->insert(Succ);
317           Fail = true;
318         }
319       }
320 
321   return !Fail;
322 }
323 
324 /// Update PHI nodes in Succ to indicate that there will now be entries in it
325 /// from the 'NewPred' block. The values that will be flowing into the PHI nodes
326 /// will be the same as those coming in from ExistPred, an existing predecessor
327 /// of Succ.
328 static void AddPredecessorToBlock(BasicBlock *Succ, BasicBlock *NewPred,
329                                   BasicBlock *ExistPred,
330                                   MemorySSAUpdater *MSSAU = nullptr) {
331   for (PHINode &PN : Succ->phis())
332     PN.addIncoming(PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred);
333   if (MSSAU)
334     if (auto *MPhi = MSSAU->getMemorySSA()->getMemoryAccess(Succ))
335       MPhi->addIncoming(MPhi->getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred);
336 }
337 
338 /// Compute an abstract "cost" of speculating the given instruction,
339 /// which is assumed to be safe to speculate. TCC_Free means cheap,
340 /// TCC_Basic means less cheap, and TCC_Expensive means prohibitively
341 /// expensive.
342 static InstructionCost computeSpeculationCost(const User *I,
343                                               const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
344   assert(isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
345          "Instruction is not safe to speculatively execute!");
346   return TTI.getUserCost(I, TargetTransformInfo::TCK_SizeAndLatency);
347 }
348 
349 /// If we have a merge point of an "if condition" as accepted above,
350 /// return true if the specified value dominates the block.  We
351 /// don't handle the true generality of domination here, just a special case
352 /// which works well enough for us.
353 ///
354 /// If AggressiveInsts is non-null, and if V does not dominate BB, we check to
355 /// see if V (which must be an instruction) and its recursive operands
356 /// that do not dominate BB have a combined cost lower than Budget and
357 /// are non-trapping.  If both are true, the instruction is inserted into the
358 /// set and true is returned.
359 ///
360 /// The cost for most non-trapping instructions is defined as 1 except for
361 /// Select whose cost is 2.
362 ///
363 /// After this function returns, Cost is increased by the cost of
364 /// V plus its non-dominating operands.  If that cost is greater than
365 /// Budget, false is returned and Cost is undefined.
366 static bool dominatesMergePoint(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
367                                 SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction *> &AggressiveInsts,
368                                 InstructionCost &Cost,
369                                 InstructionCost Budget,
370                                 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
371                                 unsigned Depth = 0) {
372   // It is possible to hit a zero-cost cycle (phi/gep instructions for example),
373   // so limit the recursion depth.
374   // TODO: While this recursion limit does prevent pathological behavior, it
375   // would be better to track visited instructions to avoid cycles.
376   if (Depth == MaxSpeculationDepth)
377     return false;
378 
379   Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
380   if (!I) {
381     // Non-instructions all dominate instructions, but not all constantexprs
382     // can be executed unconditionally.
383     if (ConstantExpr *C = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
384       if (C->canTrap())
385         return false;
386     return true;
387   }
388   BasicBlock *PBB = I->getParent();
389 
390   // We don't want to allow weird loops that might have the "if condition" in
391   // the bottom of this block.
392   if (PBB == BB)
393     return false;
394 
395   // If this instruction is defined in a block that contains an unconditional
396   // branch to BB, then it must be in the 'conditional' part of the "if
397   // statement".  If not, it definitely dominates the region.
398   BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PBB->getTerminator());
399   if (!BI || BI->isConditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB)
400     return true;
401 
402   // If we have seen this instruction before, don't count it again.
403   if (AggressiveInsts.count(I))
404     return true;
405 
406   // Okay, it looks like the instruction IS in the "condition".  Check to
407   // see if it's a cheap instruction to unconditionally compute, and if it
408   // only uses stuff defined outside of the condition.  If so, hoist it out.
409   if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I))
410     return false;
411 
412   Cost += computeSpeculationCost(I, TTI);
413 
414   // Allow exactly one instruction to be speculated regardless of its cost
415   // (as long as it is safe to do so).
416   // This is intended to flatten the CFG even if the instruction is a division
417   // or other expensive operation. The speculation of an expensive instruction
418   // is expected to be undone in CodeGenPrepare if the speculation has not
419   // enabled further IR optimizations.
420   if (Cost > Budget &&
421       (!SpeculateOneExpensiveInst || !AggressiveInsts.empty() || Depth > 0 ||
422        !Cost.isValid()))
423     return false;
424 
425   // Okay, we can only really hoist these out if their operands do
426   // not take us over the cost threshold.
427   for (Use &Op : I->operands())
428     if (!dominatesMergePoint(Op, BB, AggressiveInsts, Cost, Budget, TTI,
429                              Depth + 1))
430       return false;
431   // Okay, it's safe to do this!  Remember this instruction.
432   AggressiveInsts.insert(I);
433   return true;
434 }
435 
436 /// Extract ConstantInt from value, looking through IntToPtr
437 /// and PointerNullValue. Return NULL if value is not a constant int.
438 static ConstantInt *GetConstantInt(Value *V, const DataLayout &DL) {
439   // Normal constant int.
440   ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(V);
441   if (CI || !isa<Constant>(V) || !V->getType()->isPointerTy())
442     return CI;
443 
444   // This is some kind of pointer constant. Turn it into a pointer-sized
445   // ConstantInt if possible.
446   IntegerType *PtrTy = cast<IntegerType>(DL.getIntPtrType(V->getType()));
447 
448   // Null pointer means 0, see SelectionDAGBuilder::getValue(const Value*).
449   if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(V))
450     return ConstantInt::get(PtrTy, 0);
451 
452   // IntToPtr const int.
453   if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
454     if (CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::IntToPtr)
455       if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CE->getOperand(0))) {
456         // The constant is very likely to have the right type already.
457         if (CI->getType() == PtrTy)
458           return CI;
459         else
460           return cast<ConstantInt>(
461               ConstantExpr::getIntegerCast(CI, PtrTy, /*isSigned=*/false));
462       }
463   return nullptr;
464 }
465 
466 namespace {
467 
468 /// Given a chain of or (||) or and (&&) comparison of a value against a
469 /// constant, this will try to recover the information required for a switch
470 /// structure.
471 /// It will depth-first traverse the chain of comparison, seeking for patterns
472 /// like %a == 12 or %a < 4 and combine them to produce a set of integer
473 /// representing the different cases for the switch.
474 /// Note that if the chain is composed of '||' it will build the set of elements
475 /// that matches the comparisons (i.e. any of this value validate the chain)
476 /// while for a chain of '&&' it will build the set elements that make the test
477 /// fail.
478 struct ConstantComparesGatherer {
479   const DataLayout &DL;
480 
481   /// Value found for the switch comparison
482   Value *CompValue = nullptr;
483 
484   /// Extra clause to be checked before the switch
485   Value *Extra = nullptr;
486 
487   /// Set of integers to match in switch
488   SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> Vals;
489 
490   /// Number of comparisons matched in the and/or chain
491   unsigned UsedICmps = 0;
492 
493   /// Construct and compute the result for the comparison instruction Cond
494   ConstantComparesGatherer(Instruction *Cond, const DataLayout &DL) : DL(DL) {
495     gather(Cond);
496   }
497 
498   ConstantComparesGatherer(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
499   ConstantComparesGatherer &
500   operator=(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
501 
502 private:
503   /// Try to set the current value used for the comparison, it succeeds only if
504   /// it wasn't set before or if the new value is the same as the old one
505   bool setValueOnce(Value *NewVal) {
506     if (CompValue && CompValue != NewVal)
507       return false;
508     CompValue = NewVal;
509     return (CompValue != nullptr);
510   }
511 
512   /// Try to match Instruction "I" as a comparison against a constant and
513   /// populates the array Vals with the set of values that match (or do not
514   /// match depending on isEQ).
515   /// Return false on failure. On success, the Value the comparison matched
516   /// against is placed in CompValue.
517   /// If CompValue is already set, the function is expected to fail if a match
518   /// is found but the value compared to is different.
519   bool matchInstruction(Instruction *I, bool isEQ) {
520     // If this is an icmp against a constant, handle this as one of the cases.
521     ICmpInst *ICI;
522     ConstantInt *C;
523     if (!((ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I)) &&
524           (C = GetConstantInt(I->getOperand(1), DL)))) {
525       return false;
526     }
527 
528     Value *RHSVal;
529     const APInt *RHSC;
530 
531     // Pattern match a special case
532     // (x & ~2^z) == y --> x == y || x == y|2^z
533     // This undoes a transformation done by instcombine to fuse 2 compares.
534     if (ICI->getPredicate() == (isEQ ? ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ : ICmpInst::ICMP_NE)) {
535       // It's a little bit hard to see why the following transformations are
536       // correct. Here is a CVC3 program to verify them for 64-bit values:
537 
538       /*
539          ONE  : BITVECTOR(64) = BVZEROEXTEND(0bin1, 63);
540          x    : BITVECTOR(64);
541          y    : BITVECTOR(64);
542          z    : BITVECTOR(64);
543          mask : BITVECTOR(64) = BVSHL(ONE, z);
544          QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
545                 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y |  mask)))
546          );
547          QUERY( (y |  mask = y) =>
548                 ((x |  mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
549          );
550       */
551 
552       // Please note that each pattern must be a dual implication (<--> or
553       // iff). One directional implication can create spurious matches. If the
554       // implication is only one-way, an unsatisfiable condition on the left
555       // side can imply a satisfiable condition on the right side. Dual
556       // implication ensures that satisfiable conditions are transformed to
557       // other satisfiable conditions and unsatisfiable conditions are
558       // transformed to other unsatisfiable conditions.
559 
560       // Here is a concrete example of a unsatisfiable condition on the left
561       // implying a satisfiable condition on the right:
562       //
563       // mask = (1 << z)
564       // (x & ~mask) == y  --> (x == y || x == (y | mask))
565       //
566       // Substituting y = 3, z = 0 yields:
567       // (x & -2) == 3 --> (x == 3 || x == 2)
568 
569       // Pattern match a special case:
570       /*
571         QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
572                ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y |  mask)))
573         );
574       */
575       if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
576                 m_And(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
577         APInt Mask = ~*RHSC;
578         if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() & ~Mask) == C->getValue()) {
579           // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
580           if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
581             return false;
582 
583           Vals.push_back(C);
584           Vals.push_back(
585               ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
586                                C->getValue() | Mask));
587           UsedICmps++;
588           return true;
589         }
590       }
591 
592       // Pattern match a special case:
593       /*
594         QUERY( (y |  mask = y) =>
595                ((x |  mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
596         );
597       */
598       if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
599                 m_Or(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
600         APInt Mask = *RHSC;
601         if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() | Mask) == C->getValue()) {
602           // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
603           if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
604             return false;
605 
606           Vals.push_back(C);
607           Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
608                                           C->getValue() & ~Mask));
609           UsedICmps++;
610           return true;
611         }
612       }
613 
614       // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
615       if (!setValueOnce(ICI->getOperand(0)))
616         return false;
617 
618       UsedICmps++;
619       Vals.push_back(C);
620       return ICI->getOperand(0);
621     }
622 
623     // If we have "x ult 3", for example, then we can add 0,1,2 to the set.
624     ConstantRange Span =
625         ConstantRange::makeExactICmpRegion(ICI->getPredicate(), C->getValue());
626 
627     // Shift the range if the compare is fed by an add. This is the range
628     // compare idiom as emitted by instcombine.
629     Value *CandidateVal = I->getOperand(0);
630     if (match(I->getOperand(0), m_Add(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
631       Span = Span.subtract(*RHSC);
632       CandidateVal = RHSVal;
633     }
634 
635     // If this is an and/!= check, then we are looking to build the set of
636     // value that *don't* pass the and chain. I.e. to turn "x ugt 2" into
637     // x != 0 && x != 1.
638     if (!isEQ)
639       Span = Span.inverse();
640 
641     // If there are a ton of values, we don't want to make a ginormous switch.
642     if (Span.isSizeLargerThan(8) || Span.isEmptySet()) {
643       return false;
644     }
645 
646     // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
647     if (!setValueOnce(CandidateVal))
648       return false;
649 
650     // Add all values from the range to the set
651     for (APInt Tmp = Span.getLower(); Tmp != Span.getUpper(); ++Tmp)
652       Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(I->getContext(), Tmp));
653 
654     UsedICmps++;
655     return true;
656   }
657 
658   /// Given a potentially 'or'd or 'and'd together collection of icmp
659   /// eq/ne/lt/gt instructions that compare a value against a constant, extract
660   /// the value being compared, and stick the list constants into the Vals
661   /// vector.
662   /// One "Extra" case is allowed to differ from the other.
663   void gather(Value *V) {
664     bool isEQ = match(V, m_LogicalOr(m_Value(), m_Value()));
665 
666     // Keep a stack (SmallVector for efficiency) for depth-first traversal
667     SmallVector<Value *, 8> DFT;
668     SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Visited;
669 
670     // Initialize
671     Visited.insert(V);
672     DFT.push_back(V);
673 
674     while (!DFT.empty()) {
675       V = DFT.pop_back_val();
676 
677       if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V)) {
678         // If it is a || (or && depending on isEQ), process the operands.
679         Value *Op0, *Op1;
680         if (isEQ ? match(I, m_LogicalOr(m_Value(Op0), m_Value(Op1)))
681                  : match(I, m_LogicalAnd(m_Value(Op0), m_Value(Op1)))) {
682           if (Visited.insert(Op1).second)
683             DFT.push_back(Op1);
684           if (Visited.insert(Op0).second)
685             DFT.push_back(Op0);
686 
687           continue;
688         }
689 
690         // Try to match the current instruction
691         if (matchInstruction(I, isEQ))
692           // Match succeed, continue the loop
693           continue;
694       }
695 
696       // One element of the sequence of || (or &&) could not be match as a
697       // comparison against the same value as the others.
698       // We allow only one "Extra" case to be checked before the switch
699       if (!Extra) {
700         Extra = V;
701         continue;
702       }
703       // Failed to parse a proper sequence, abort now
704       CompValue = nullptr;
705       break;
706     }
707   }
708 };
709 
710 } // end anonymous namespace
711 
712 static void EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(Instruction *TI,
713                                       MemorySSAUpdater *MSSAU = nullptr) {
714   Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
715   if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
716     Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(SI->getCondition());
717   } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
718     if (BI->isConditional())
719       Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
720   } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(TI)) {
721     Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(IBI->getAddress());
722   }
723 
724   TI->eraseFromParent();
725   if (Cond)
726     RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Cond, nullptr, MSSAU);
727 }
728 
729 /// Return true if the specified terminator checks
730 /// to see if a value is equal to constant integer value.
731 Value *SimplifyCFGOpt::isValueEqualityComparison(Instruction *TI) {
732   Value *CV = nullptr;
733   if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
734     // Do not permit merging of large switch instructions into their
735     // predecessors unless there is only one predecessor.
736     if (!SI->getParent()->hasNPredecessorsOrMore(128 / SI->getNumSuccessors()))
737       CV = SI->getCondition();
738   } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI))
739     if (BI->isConditional() && BI->getCondition()->hasOneUse())
740       if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition())) {
741         if (ICI->isEquality() && GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL))
742           CV = ICI->getOperand(0);
743       }
744 
745   // Unwrap any lossless ptrtoint cast.
746   if (CV) {
747     if (PtrToIntInst *PTII = dyn_cast<PtrToIntInst>(CV)) {
748       Value *Ptr = PTII->getPointerOperand();
749       if (PTII->getType() == DL.getIntPtrType(Ptr->getType()))
750         CV = Ptr;
751     }
752   }
753   return CV;
754 }
755 
756 /// Given a value comparison instruction,
757 /// decode all of the 'cases' that it represents and return the 'default' block.
758 BasicBlock *SimplifyCFGOpt::GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
759     Instruction *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
760   if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
761     Cases.reserve(SI->getNumCases());
762     for (auto Case : SI->cases())
763       Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(Case.getCaseValue(),
764                                                   Case.getCaseSuccessor()));
765     return SI->getDefaultDest();
766   }
767 
768   BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(TI);
769   ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
770   BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE);
771   Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(
772       GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL), Succ));
773   return BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ);
774 }
775 
776 /// Given a vector of bb/value pairs, remove any entries
777 /// in the list that match the specified block.
778 static void
779 EliminateBlockCases(BasicBlock *BB,
780                     std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
781   llvm::erase_value(Cases, BB);
782 }
783 
784 /// Return true if there are any keys in C1 that exist in C2 as well.
785 static bool ValuesOverlap(std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C1,
786                           std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C2) {
787   std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> *V1 = &C1, *V2 = &C2;
788 
789   // Make V1 be smaller than V2.
790   if (V1->size() > V2->size())
791     std::swap(V1, V2);
792 
793   if (V1->empty())
794     return false;
795   if (V1->size() == 1) {
796     // Just scan V2.
797     ConstantInt *TheVal = (*V1)[0].Value;
798     for (unsigned i = 0, e = V2->size(); i != e; ++i)
799       if (TheVal == (*V2)[i].Value)
800         return true;
801   }
802 
803   // Otherwise, just sort both lists and compare element by element.
804   array_pod_sort(V1->begin(), V1->end());
805   array_pod_sort(V2->begin(), V2->end());
806   unsigned i1 = 0, i2 = 0, e1 = V1->size(), e2 = V2->size();
807   while (i1 != e1 && i2 != e2) {
808     if ((*V1)[i1].Value == (*V2)[i2].Value)
809       return true;
810     if ((*V1)[i1].Value < (*V2)[i2].Value)
811       ++i1;
812     else
813       ++i2;
814   }
815   return false;
816 }
817 
818 // Set branch weights on SwitchInst. This sets the metadata if there is at
819 // least one non-zero weight.
820 static void setBranchWeights(SwitchInst *SI, ArrayRef<uint32_t> Weights) {
821   // Check that there is at least one non-zero weight. Otherwise, pass
822   // nullptr to setMetadata which will erase the existing metadata.
823   MDNode *N = nullptr;
824   if (llvm::any_of(Weights, [](uint32_t W) { return W != 0; }))
825     N = MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext()).createBranchWeights(Weights);
826   SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, N);
827 }
828 
829 // Similar to the above, but for branch and select instructions that take
830 // exactly 2 weights.
831 static void setBranchWeights(Instruction *I, uint32_t TrueWeight,
832                              uint32_t FalseWeight) {
833   assert(isa<BranchInst>(I) || isa<SelectInst>(I));
834   // Check that there is at least one non-zero weight. Otherwise, pass
835   // nullptr to setMetadata which will erase the existing metadata.
836   MDNode *N = nullptr;
837   if (TrueWeight || FalseWeight)
838     N = MDBuilder(I->getParent()->getContext())
839             .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
840   I->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, N);
841 }
842 
843 /// If TI is known to be a terminator instruction and its block is known to
844 /// only have a single predecessor block, check to see if that predecessor is
845 /// also a value comparison with the same value, and if that comparison
846 /// determines the outcome of this comparison. If so, simplify TI. This does a
847 /// very limited form of jump threading.
848 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(
849     Instruction *TI, BasicBlock *Pred, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
850   Value *PredVal = isValueEqualityComparison(Pred->getTerminator());
851   if (!PredVal)
852     return false; // Not a value comparison in predecessor.
853 
854   Value *ThisVal = isValueEqualityComparison(TI);
855   assert(ThisVal && "This isn't a value comparison!!");
856   if (ThisVal != PredVal)
857     return false; // Different predicates.
858 
859   // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
860   // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
861 
862   // Find out information about when control will move from Pred to TI's block.
863   std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
864   BasicBlock *PredDef =
865       GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(Pred->getTerminator(), PredCases);
866   EliminateBlockCases(PredDef, PredCases); // Remove default from cases.
867 
868   // Find information about how control leaves this block.
869   std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> ThisCases;
870   BasicBlock *ThisDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, ThisCases);
871   EliminateBlockCases(ThisDef, ThisCases); // Remove default from cases.
872 
873   // If TI's block is the default block from Pred's comparison, potentially
874   // simplify TI based on this knowledge.
875   if (PredDef == TI->getParent()) {
876     // If we are here, we know that the value is none of those cases listed in
877     // PredCases.  If there are any cases in ThisCases that are in PredCases, we
878     // can simplify TI.
879     if (!ValuesOverlap(PredCases, ThisCases))
880       return false;
881 
882     if (isa<BranchInst>(TI)) {
883       // Okay, one of the successors of this condbr is dead.  Convert it to a
884       // uncond br.
885       assert(ThisCases.size() == 1 && "Branch can only have one case!");
886       // Insert the new branch.
887       Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(ThisDef);
888       (void)NI;
889 
890       // Remove PHI node entries for the dead edge.
891       ThisCases[0].Dest->removePredecessor(PredDef);
892 
893       LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
894                         << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
895                         << "\n");
896 
897       EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(TI);
898 
899       if (DTU)
900         DTU->applyUpdates(
901             {{DominatorTree::Delete, PredDef, ThisCases[0].Dest}});
902 
903       return true;
904     }
905 
906     SwitchInstProfUpdateWrapper SI = *cast<SwitchInst>(TI);
907     // Okay, TI has cases that are statically dead, prune them away.
908     SmallPtrSet<Constant *, 16> DeadCases;
909     for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
910       DeadCases.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
911 
912     LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
913                       << "Through successor TI: " << *TI);
914 
915     SmallDenseMap<BasicBlock *, int, 8> NumPerSuccessorCases;
916     for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_end(), e = SI->case_begin(); i != e;) {
917       --i;
918       auto *Successor = i->getCaseSuccessor();
919       if (DTU)
920         ++NumPerSuccessorCases[Successor];
921       if (DeadCases.count(i->getCaseValue())) {
922         Successor->removePredecessor(PredDef);
923         SI.removeCase(i);
924         if (DTU)
925           --NumPerSuccessorCases[Successor];
926       }
927     }
928 
929     if (DTU) {
930       std::vector<DominatorTree::UpdateType> Updates;
931       for (const std::pair<BasicBlock *, int> &I : NumPerSuccessorCases)
932         if (I.second == 0)
933           Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, PredDef, I.first});
934       DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
935     }
936 
937     LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Leaving: " << *TI << "\n");
938     return true;
939   }
940 
941   // Otherwise, TI's block must correspond to some matched value.  Find out
942   // which value (or set of values) this is.
943   ConstantInt *TIV = nullptr;
944   BasicBlock *TIBB = TI->getParent();
945   for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
946     if (PredCases[i].Dest == TIBB) {
947       if (TIV)
948         return false; // Cannot handle multiple values coming to this block.
949       TIV = PredCases[i].Value;
950     }
951   assert(TIV && "No edge from pred to succ?");
952 
953   // Okay, we found the one constant that our value can be if we get into TI's
954   // BB.  Find out which successor will unconditionally be branched to.
955   BasicBlock *TheRealDest = nullptr;
956   for (unsigned i = 0, e = ThisCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
957     if (ThisCases[i].Value == TIV) {
958       TheRealDest = ThisCases[i].Dest;
959       break;
960     }
961 
962   // If not handled by any explicit cases, it is handled by the default case.
963   if (!TheRealDest)
964     TheRealDest = ThisDef;
965 
966   SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 2> RemovedSuccs;
967 
968   // Remove PHI node entries for dead edges.
969   BasicBlock *CheckEdge = TheRealDest;
970   for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(TIBB))
971     if (Succ != CheckEdge) {
972       if (Succ != TheRealDest)
973         RemovedSuccs.insert(Succ);
974       Succ->removePredecessor(TIBB);
975     } else
976       CheckEdge = nullptr;
977 
978   // Insert the new branch.
979   Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(TheRealDest);
980   (void)NI;
981 
982   LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
983                     << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
984                     << "\n");
985 
986   EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(TI);
987   if (DTU) {
988     SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 2> Updates;
989     Updates.reserve(RemovedSuccs.size());
990     for (auto *RemovedSucc : RemovedSuccs)
991       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, TIBB, RemovedSucc});
992     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
993   }
994   return true;
995 }
996 
997 namespace {
998 
999 /// This class implements a stable ordering of constant
1000 /// integers that does not depend on their address.  This is important for
1001 /// applications that sort ConstantInt's to ensure uniqueness.
1002 struct ConstantIntOrdering {
1003   bool operator()(const ConstantInt *LHS, const ConstantInt *RHS) const {
1004     return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue());
1005   }
1006 };
1007 
1008 } // end anonymous namespace
1009 
1010 static int ConstantIntSortPredicate(ConstantInt *const *P1,
1011                                     ConstantInt *const *P2) {
1012   const ConstantInt *LHS = *P1;
1013   const ConstantInt *RHS = *P2;
1014   if (LHS == RHS)
1015     return 0;
1016   return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue()) ? 1 : -1;
1017 }
1018 
1019 static inline bool HasBranchWeights(const Instruction *I) {
1020   MDNode *ProfMD = I->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
1021   if (ProfMD && ProfMD->getOperand(0))
1022     if (MDString *MDS = dyn_cast<MDString>(ProfMD->getOperand(0)))
1023       return MDS->getString().equals("branch_weights");
1024 
1025   return false;
1026 }
1027 
1028 /// Get Weights of a given terminator, the default weight is at the front
1029 /// of the vector. If TI is a conditional eq, we need to swap the branch-weight
1030 /// metadata.
1031 static void GetBranchWeights(Instruction *TI,
1032                              SmallVectorImpl<uint64_t> &Weights) {
1033   MDNode *MD = TI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
1034   assert(MD);
1035   for (unsigned i = 1, e = MD->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i) {
1036     ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(i));
1037     Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
1038   }
1039 
1040   // If TI is a conditional eq, the default case is the false case,
1041   // and the corresponding branch-weight data is at index 2. We swap the
1042   // default weight to be the first entry.
1043   if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
1044     assert(Weights.size() == 2);
1045     ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
1046     if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
1047       std::swap(Weights.front(), Weights.back());
1048   }
1049 }
1050 
1051 /// Keep halving the weights until all can fit in uint32_t.
1052 static void FitWeights(MutableArrayRef<uint64_t> Weights) {
1053   uint64_t Max = *std::max_element(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
1054   if (Max > UINT_MAX) {
1055     unsigned Offset = 32 - countLeadingZeros(Max);
1056     for (uint64_t &I : Weights)
1057       I >>= Offset;
1058   }
1059 }
1060 
1061 static void CloneInstructionsIntoPredecessorBlockAndUpdateSSAUses(
1062     BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *PredBlock, ValueToValueMapTy &VMap) {
1063   Instruction *PTI = PredBlock->getTerminator();
1064 
1065   // If we have bonus instructions, clone them into the predecessor block.
1066   // Note that there may be multiple predecessor blocks, so we cannot move
1067   // bonus instructions to a predecessor block.
1068   for (Instruction &BonusInst : *BB) {
1069     if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BonusInst) || BonusInst.isTerminator())
1070       continue;
1071 
1072     Instruction *NewBonusInst = BonusInst.clone();
1073 
1074     if (PTI->getDebugLoc() != NewBonusInst->getDebugLoc()) {
1075       // Unless the instruction has the same !dbg location as the original
1076       // branch, drop it. When we fold the bonus instructions we want to make
1077       // sure we reset their debug locations in order to avoid stepping on
1078       // dead code caused by folding dead branches.
1079       NewBonusInst->setDebugLoc(DebugLoc());
1080     }
1081 
1082     RemapInstruction(NewBonusInst, VMap,
1083                      RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
1084     VMap[&BonusInst] = NewBonusInst;
1085 
1086     // If we moved a load, we cannot any longer claim any knowledge about
1087     // its potential value. The previous information might have been valid
1088     // only given the branch precondition.
1089     // For an analogous reason, we must also drop all the metadata whose
1090     // semantics we don't understand. We *can* preserve !annotation, because
1091     // it is tied to the instruction itself, not the value or position.
1092     NewBonusInst->dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_annotation);
1093 
1094     PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PTI->getIterator(), NewBonusInst);
1095     NewBonusInst->takeName(&BonusInst);
1096     BonusInst.setName(NewBonusInst->getName() + ".old");
1097 
1098     // Update (liveout) uses of bonus instructions,
1099     // now that the bonus instruction has been cloned into predecessor.
1100     SSAUpdater SSAUpdate;
1101     SSAUpdate.Initialize(BonusInst.getType(),
1102                          (NewBonusInst->getName() + ".merge").str());
1103     SSAUpdate.AddAvailableValue(BB, &BonusInst);
1104     SSAUpdate.AddAvailableValue(PredBlock, NewBonusInst);
1105     for (Use &U : make_early_inc_range(BonusInst.uses())) {
1106       auto *UI = cast<Instruction>(U.getUser());
1107       if (UI->getParent() != PredBlock)
1108         SSAUpdate.RewriteUseAfterInsertions(U);
1109       else // Use is in the same block as, and comes before, NewBonusInst.
1110         SSAUpdate.RewriteUse(U);
1111     }
1112   }
1113 }
1114 
1115 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::PerformValueComparisonIntoPredecessorFolding(
1116     Instruction *TI, Value *&CV, Instruction *PTI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
1117   BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent();
1118   BasicBlock *Pred = PTI->getParent();
1119 
1120   SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 32> Updates;
1121 
1122   // Figure out which 'cases' to copy from SI to PSI.
1123   std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> BBCases;
1124   BasicBlock *BBDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, BBCases);
1125 
1126   std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
1127   BasicBlock *PredDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(PTI, PredCases);
1128 
1129   // Based on whether the default edge from PTI goes to BB or not, fill in
1130   // PredCases and PredDefault with the new switch cases we would like to
1131   // build.
1132   SmallMapVector<BasicBlock *, int, 8> NewSuccessors;
1133 
1134   // Update the branch weight metadata along the way
1135   SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
1136   bool PredHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(PTI);
1137   bool SuccHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(TI);
1138 
1139   if (PredHasWeights) {
1140     GetBranchWeights(PTI, Weights);
1141     // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
1142     if (Weights.size() != 1 + PredCases.size())
1143       PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
1144   } else if (SuccHasWeights)
1145     // If there are no predecessor weights but there are successor weights,
1146     // populate Weights with 1, which will later be scaled to the sum of
1147     // successor's weights
1148     Weights.assign(1 + PredCases.size(), 1);
1149 
1150   SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> SuccWeights;
1151   if (SuccHasWeights) {
1152     GetBranchWeights(TI, SuccWeights);
1153     // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
1154     if (SuccWeights.size() != 1 + BBCases.size())
1155       PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
1156   } else if (PredHasWeights)
1157     SuccWeights.assign(1 + BBCases.size(), 1);
1158 
1159   if (PredDefault == BB) {
1160     // If this is the default destination from PTI, only the edges in TI
1161     // that don't occur in PTI, or that branch to BB will be activated.
1162     std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
1163     for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1164       if (PredCases[i].Dest != BB)
1165         PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
1166       else {
1167         // The default destination is BB, we don't need explicit targets.
1168         std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
1169 
1170         if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1171           // Increase weight for the default case.
1172           Weights[0] += Weights[i + 1];
1173           std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
1174           Weights.pop_back();
1175         }
1176 
1177         PredCases.pop_back();
1178         --i;
1179         --e;
1180       }
1181 
1182     // Reconstruct the new switch statement we will be building.
1183     if (PredDefault != BBDefault) {
1184       PredDefault->removePredecessor(Pred);
1185       if (DTU && PredDefault != BB)
1186         Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, Pred, PredDefault});
1187       PredDefault = BBDefault;
1188       ++NewSuccessors[BBDefault];
1189     }
1190 
1191     unsigned CasesFromPred = Weights.size();
1192     uint64_t ValidTotalSuccWeight = 0;
1193     for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1194       if (!PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value) && BBCases[i].Dest != BBDefault) {
1195         PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1196         ++NewSuccessors[BBCases[i].Dest];
1197         if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1198           // The default weight is at index 0, so weight for the ith case
1199           // should be at index i+1. Scale the cases from successor by
1200           // PredDefaultWeight (Weights[0]).
1201           Weights.push_back(Weights[0] * SuccWeights[i + 1]);
1202           ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[i + 1];
1203         }
1204       }
1205 
1206     if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1207       ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[0];
1208       // Scale the cases from predecessor by ValidTotalSuccWeight.
1209       for (unsigned i = 1; i < CasesFromPred; ++i)
1210         Weights[i] *= ValidTotalSuccWeight;
1211       // Scale the default weight by SuccDefaultWeight (SuccWeights[0]).
1212       Weights[0] *= SuccWeights[0];
1213     }
1214   } else {
1215     // If this is not the default destination from PSI, only the edges
1216     // in SI that occur in PSI with a destination of BB will be
1217     // activated.
1218     std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
1219     std::map<ConstantInt *, uint64_t> WeightsForHandled;
1220     for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1221       if (PredCases[i].Dest == BB) {
1222         PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
1223 
1224         if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1225           WeightsForHandled[PredCases[i].Value] = Weights[i + 1];
1226           std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
1227           Weights.pop_back();
1228         }
1229 
1230         std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
1231         PredCases.pop_back();
1232         --i;
1233         --e;
1234       }
1235 
1236     // Okay, now we know which constants were sent to BB from the
1237     // predecessor.  Figure out where they will all go now.
1238     for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1239       if (PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value)) {
1240         // If this is one we are capable of getting...
1241         if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
1242           Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[BBCases[i].Value]);
1243         PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1244         ++NewSuccessors[BBCases[i].Dest];
1245         PTIHandled.erase(BBCases[i].Value); // This constant is taken care of
1246       }
1247 
1248     // If there are any constants vectored to BB that TI doesn't handle,
1249     // they must go to the default destination of TI.
1250     for (ConstantInt *I : PTIHandled) {
1251       if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
1252         Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[I]);
1253       PredCases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(I, BBDefault));
1254       ++NewSuccessors[BBDefault];
1255     }
1256   }
1257 
1258   // Okay, at this point, we know which new successor Pred will get.  Make
1259   // sure we update the number of entries in the PHI nodes for these
1260   // successors.
1261   SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 2> SuccsOfPred;
1262   if (DTU) {
1263     SuccsOfPred = {succ_begin(Pred), succ_end(Pred)};
1264     Updates.reserve(Updates.size() + NewSuccessors.size());
1265   }
1266   for (const std::pair<BasicBlock *, int /*Num*/> &NewSuccessor :
1267        NewSuccessors) {
1268     for (auto I : seq(0, NewSuccessor.second)) {
1269       (void)I;
1270       AddPredecessorToBlock(NewSuccessor.first, Pred, BB);
1271     }
1272     if (DTU && !SuccsOfPred.contains(NewSuccessor.first))
1273       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, Pred, NewSuccessor.first});
1274   }
1275 
1276   Builder.SetInsertPoint(PTI);
1277   // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
1278   if (CV->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
1279     CV =
1280         Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CV, DL.getIntPtrType(CV->getType()), "magicptr");
1281   }
1282 
1283   // Now that the successors are updated, create the new Switch instruction.
1284   SwitchInst *NewSI = Builder.CreateSwitch(CV, PredDefault, PredCases.size());
1285   NewSI->setDebugLoc(PTI->getDebugLoc());
1286   for (ValueEqualityComparisonCase &V : PredCases)
1287     NewSI->addCase(V.Value, V.Dest);
1288 
1289   if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1290     // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
1291     FitWeights(Weights);
1292 
1293     SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
1294 
1295     setBranchWeights(NewSI, MDWeights);
1296   }
1297 
1298   EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(PTI);
1299 
1300   // Okay, last check.  If BB is still a successor of PSI, then we must
1301   // have an infinite loop case.  If so, add an infinitely looping block
1302   // to handle the case to preserve the behavior of the code.
1303   BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = nullptr;
1304   for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1305     if (NewSI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
1306       if (!InfLoopBlock) {
1307         // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
1308         // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
1309         InfLoopBlock =
1310             BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop", BB->getParent());
1311         BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
1312         if (DTU)
1313           Updates.push_back(
1314               {DominatorTree::Insert, InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock});
1315       }
1316       NewSI->setSuccessor(i, InfLoopBlock);
1317     }
1318 
1319   if (DTU) {
1320     if (InfLoopBlock)
1321       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, Pred, InfLoopBlock});
1322 
1323     Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, Pred, BB});
1324 
1325     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
1326   }
1327 
1328   ++NumFoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors;
1329   return true;
1330 }
1331 
1332 /// The specified terminator is a value equality comparison instruction
1333 /// (either a switch or a branch on "X == c").
1334 /// See if any of the predecessors of the terminator block are value comparisons
1335 /// on the same value.  If so, and if safe to do so, fold them together.
1336 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(Instruction *TI,
1337                                                          IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
1338   BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent();
1339   Value *CV = isValueEqualityComparison(TI); // CondVal
1340   assert(CV && "Not a comparison?");
1341 
1342   bool Changed = false;
1343 
1344   SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
1345   while (!Preds.empty()) {
1346     BasicBlock *Pred = Preds.pop_back_val();
1347     Instruction *PTI = Pred->getTerminator();
1348 
1349     // Don't try to fold into itself.
1350     if (Pred == BB)
1351       continue;
1352 
1353     // See if the predecessor is a comparison with the same value.
1354     Value *PCV = isValueEqualityComparison(PTI); // PredCondVal
1355     if (PCV != CV)
1356       continue;
1357 
1358     SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 4> FailBlocks;
1359     if (!SafeToMergeTerminators(TI, PTI, &FailBlocks)) {
1360       for (auto *Succ : FailBlocks) {
1361         if (!SplitBlockPredecessors(Succ, TI->getParent(), ".fold.split", DTU))
1362           return false;
1363       }
1364     }
1365 
1366     PerformValueComparisonIntoPredecessorFolding(TI, CV, PTI, Builder);
1367     Changed = true;
1368   }
1369   return Changed;
1370 }
1371 
1372 // If we would need to insert a select that uses the value of this invoke
1373 // (comments in HoistThenElseCodeToIf explain why we would need to do this), we
1374 // can't hoist the invoke, as there is nowhere to put the select in this case.
1375 static bool isSafeToHoistInvoke(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2,
1376                                 Instruction *I1, Instruction *I2) {
1377   for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
1378     for (const PHINode &PN : Succ->phis()) {
1379       Value *BB1V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1380       Value *BB2V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
1381       if (BB1V != BB2V && (BB1V == I1 || BB2V == I2)) {
1382         return false;
1383       }
1384     }
1385   }
1386   return true;
1387 }
1388 
1389 static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I, bool PtrValueMayBeModified = false);
1390 
1391 /// Given a conditional branch that goes to BB1 and BB2, hoist any common code
1392 /// in the two blocks up into the branch block. The caller of this function
1393 /// guarantees that BI's block dominates BB1 and BB2. If EqTermsOnly is given,
1394 /// only perform hoisting in case both blocks only contain a terminator. In that
1395 /// case, only the original BI will be replaced and selects for PHIs are added.
1396 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI,
1397                                            const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
1398                                            bool EqTermsOnly) {
1399   // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1400   // instructions in the two blocks.  In particular, we don't want to get into
1401   // O(M*N) situations here where M and N are the sizes of BB1 and BB2.  As
1402   // such, we currently just scan for obviously identical instructions in an
1403   // identical order.
1404   BasicBlock *BB1 = BI->getSuccessor(0); // The true destination.
1405   BasicBlock *BB2 = BI->getSuccessor(1); // The false destination
1406 
1407   // If either of the blocks has it's address taken, then we can't do this fold,
1408   // because the code we'd hoist would no longer run when we jump into the block
1409   // by it's address.
1410   if (BB1->hasAddressTaken() || BB2->hasAddressTaken())
1411     return false;
1412 
1413   BasicBlock::iterator BB1_Itr = BB1->begin();
1414   BasicBlock::iterator BB2_Itr = BB2->begin();
1415 
1416   Instruction *I1 = &*BB1_Itr++, *I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
1417   // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1418   DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1419   DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1420   if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1421     while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
1422       I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1423     while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
1424       I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
1425   }
1426   // FIXME: Can we define a safety predicate for CallBr?
1427   if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || !I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2) ||
1428       (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2)) ||
1429       isa<CallBrInst>(I1))
1430     return false;
1431 
1432   BasicBlock *BIParent = BI->getParent();
1433 
1434   bool Changed = false;
1435 
1436   auto _ = make_scope_exit([&]() {
1437     if (Changed)
1438       ++NumHoistCommonCode;
1439   });
1440 
1441   // Check if only hoisting terminators is allowed. This does not add new
1442   // instructions to the hoist location.
1443   if (EqTermsOnly) {
1444     // Skip any debug intrinsics, as they are free to hoist.
1445     auto *I1NonDbg = &*skipDebugIntrinsics(I1->getIterator());
1446     auto *I2NonDbg = &*skipDebugIntrinsics(I2->getIterator());
1447     if (!I1NonDbg->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2NonDbg))
1448       return false;
1449     if (!I1NonDbg->isTerminator())
1450       return false;
1451     // Now we know that we only need to hoist debug instrinsics and the
1452     // terminator. Let the loop below handle those 2 cases.
1453   }
1454 
1455   do {
1456     // If we are hoisting the terminator instruction, don't move one (making a
1457     // broken BB), instead clone it, and remove BI.
1458     if (I1->isTerminator())
1459       goto HoistTerminator;
1460 
1461     // If we're going to hoist a call, make sure that the two instructions we're
1462     // commoning/hoisting are both marked with musttail, or neither of them is
1463     // marked as such. Otherwise, we might end up in a situation where we hoist
1464     // from a block where the terminator is a `ret` to a block where the terminator
1465     // is a `br`, and `musttail` calls expect to be followed by a return.
1466     auto *C1 = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I1);
1467     auto *C2 = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I2);
1468     if (C1 && C2)
1469       if (C1->isMustTailCall() != C2->isMustTailCall())
1470         return Changed;
1471 
1472     if (!TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I1) || !TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I2))
1473       return Changed;
1474 
1475     // If any of the two call sites has nomerge attribute, stop hoisting.
1476     if (const auto *CB1 = dyn_cast<CallBase>(I1))
1477       if (CB1->cannotMerge())
1478         return Changed;
1479     if (const auto *CB2 = dyn_cast<CallBase>(I2))
1480       if (CB2->cannotMerge())
1481         return Changed;
1482 
1483     if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1) || isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2)) {
1484       assert (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1) && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2));
1485       // The debug location is an integral part of a debug info intrinsic
1486       // and can't be separated from it or replaced.  Instead of attempting
1487       // to merge locations, simply hoist both copies of the intrinsic.
1488       BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(),
1489                                      BB1->getInstList(), I1);
1490       BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(),
1491                                      BB2->getInstList(), I2);
1492       Changed = true;
1493     } else {
1494       // For a normal instruction, we just move one to right before the branch,
1495       // then replace all uses of the other with the first.  Finally, we remove
1496       // the now redundant second instruction.
1497       BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(),
1498                                      BB1->getInstList(), I1);
1499       if (!I2->use_empty())
1500         I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
1501       I1->andIRFlags(I2);
1502       unsigned KnownIDs[] = {LLVMContext::MD_tbaa,
1503                              LLVMContext::MD_range,
1504                              LLVMContext::MD_fpmath,
1505                              LLVMContext::MD_invariant_load,
1506                              LLVMContext::MD_nonnull,
1507                              LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group,
1508                              LLVMContext::MD_align,
1509                              LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable,
1510                              LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable_or_null,
1511                              LLVMContext::MD_mem_parallel_loop_access,
1512                              LLVMContext::MD_access_group,
1513                              LLVMContext::MD_preserve_access_index};
1514       combineMetadata(I1, I2, KnownIDs, true);
1515 
1516       // I1 and I2 are being combined into a single instruction.  Its debug
1517       // location is the merged locations of the original instructions.
1518       I1->applyMergedLocation(I1->getDebugLoc(), I2->getDebugLoc());
1519 
1520       I2->eraseFromParent();
1521       Changed = true;
1522     }
1523     ++NumHoistCommonInstrs;
1524 
1525     I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1526     I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
1527     // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1528     DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1529     DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1530     if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1531       while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
1532         I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1533       while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
1534         I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
1535     }
1536   } while (I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2));
1537 
1538   return true;
1539 
1540 HoistTerminator:
1541   // It may not be possible to hoist an invoke.
1542   // FIXME: Can we define a safety predicate for CallBr?
1543   if (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2))
1544     return Changed;
1545 
1546   // TODO: callbr hoisting currently disabled pending further study.
1547   if (isa<CallBrInst>(I1))
1548     return Changed;
1549 
1550   for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
1551     for (PHINode &PN : Succ->phis()) {
1552       Value *BB1V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1553       Value *BB2V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
1554       if (BB1V == BB2V)
1555         continue;
1556 
1557       // Check for passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined here because we would rather
1558       // eliminate undefined control flow then converting it to a select.
1559       if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB1V, &PN) ||
1560           passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB2V, &PN))
1561         return Changed;
1562 
1563       if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB1V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB1V))
1564         return Changed;
1565       if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB2V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB2V))
1566         return Changed;
1567     }
1568   }
1569 
1570   // Okay, it is safe to hoist the terminator.
1571   Instruction *NT = I1->clone();
1572   BIParent->getInstList().insert(BI->getIterator(), NT);
1573   if (!NT->getType()->isVoidTy()) {
1574     I1->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
1575     I2->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
1576     NT->takeName(I1);
1577   }
1578   Changed = true;
1579   ++NumHoistCommonInstrs;
1580 
1581   // Ensure terminator gets a debug location, even an unknown one, in case
1582   // it involves inlinable calls.
1583   NT->applyMergedLocation(I1->getDebugLoc(), I2->getDebugLoc());
1584 
1585   // PHIs created below will adopt NT's merged DebugLoc.
1586   IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(NT);
1587 
1588   // Hoisting one of the terminators from our successor is a great thing.
1589   // Unfortunately, the successors of the if/else blocks may have PHI nodes in
1590   // them.  If they do, all PHI entries for BB1/BB2 must agree for all PHI
1591   // nodes, so we insert select instruction to compute the final result.
1592   std::map<std::pair<Value *, Value *>, SelectInst *> InsertedSelects;
1593   for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
1594     for (PHINode &PN : Succ->phis()) {
1595       Value *BB1V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1596       Value *BB2V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
1597       if (BB1V == BB2V)
1598         continue;
1599 
1600       // These values do not agree.  Insert a select instruction before NT
1601       // that determines the right value.
1602       SelectInst *&SI = InsertedSelects[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)];
1603       if (!SI) {
1604         // Propagate fast-math-flags from phi node to its replacement select.
1605         IRBuilder<>::FastMathFlagGuard FMFGuard(Builder);
1606         if (isa<FPMathOperator>(PN))
1607           Builder.setFastMathFlags(PN.getFastMathFlags());
1608 
1609         SI = cast<SelectInst>(
1610             Builder.CreateSelect(BI->getCondition(), BB1V, BB2V,
1611                                  BB1V->getName() + "." + BB2V->getName(), BI));
1612       }
1613 
1614       // Make the PHI node use the select for all incoming values for BB1/BB2
1615       for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN.getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
1616         if (PN.getIncomingBlock(i) == BB1 || PN.getIncomingBlock(i) == BB2)
1617           PN.setIncomingValue(i, SI);
1618     }
1619   }
1620 
1621   SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 4> Updates;
1622 
1623   // Update any PHI nodes in our new successors.
1624   for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
1625     AddPredecessorToBlock(Succ, BIParent, BB1);
1626     if (DTU)
1627       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, BIParent, Succ});
1628   }
1629 
1630   if (DTU)
1631     for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BI))
1632       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, BIParent, Succ});
1633 
1634   EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(BI);
1635   if (DTU)
1636     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
1637   return Changed;
1638 }
1639 
1640 // Check lifetime markers.
1641 static bool isLifeTimeMarker(const Instruction *I) {
1642   if (auto II = dyn_cast<IntrinsicInst>(I)) {
1643     switch (II->getIntrinsicID()) {
1644     default:
1645       break;
1646     case Intrinsic::lifetime_start:
1647     case Intrinsic::lifetime_end:
1648       return true;
1649     }
1650   }
1651   return false;
1652 }
1653 
1654 // TODO: Refine this. This should avoid cases like turning constant memcpy sizes
1655 // into variables.
1656 static bool replacingOperandWithVariableIsCheap(const Instruction *I,
1657                                                 int OpIdx) {
1658   return !isa<IntrinsicInst>(I);
1659 }
1660 
1661 // All instructions in Insts belong to different blocks that all unconditionally
1662 // branch to a common successor. Analyze each instruction and return true if it
1663 // would be possible to sink them into their successor, creating one common
1664 // instruction instead. For every value that would be required to be provided by
1665 // PHI node (because an operand varies in each input block), add to PHIOperands.
1666 static bool canSinkInstructions(
1667     ArrayRef<Instruction *> Insts,
1668     DenseMap<Instruction *, SmallVector<Value *, 4>> &PHIOperands) {
1669   // Prune out obviously bad instructions to move. Each instruction must have
1670   // exactly zero or one use, and we check later that use is by a single, common
1671   // PHI instruction in the successor.
1672   bool HasUse = !Insts.front()->user_empty();
1673   for (auto *I : Insts) {
1674     // These instructions may change or break semantics if moved.
1675     if (isa<PHINode>(I) || I->isEHPad() || isa<AllocaInst>(I) ||
1676         I->getType()->isTokenTy())
1677       return false;
1678 
1679     // Do not try to sink an instruction in an infinite loop - it can cause
1680     // this algorithm to infinite loop.
1681     if (I->getParent()->getSingleSuccessor() == I->getParent())
1682       return false;
1683 
1684     // Conservatively return false if I is an inline-asm instruction. Sinking
1685     // and merging inline-asm instructions can potentially create arguments
1686     // that cannot satisfy the inline-asm constraints.
1687     // If the instruction has nomerge attribute, return false.
1688     if (const auto *C = dyn_cast<CallBase>(I))
1689       if (C->isInlineAsm() || C->cannotMerge())
1690         return false;
1691 
1692     // Each instruction must have zero or one use.
1693     if (HasUse && !I->hasOneUse())
1694       return false;
1695     if (!HasUse && !I->user_empty())
1696       return false;
1697   }
1698 
1699   const Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
1700   for (auto *I : Insts)
1701     if (!I->isSameOperationAs(I0))
1702       return false;
1703 
1704   // All instructions in Insts are known to be the same opcode. If they have a
1705   // use, check that the only user is a PHI or in the same block as the
1706   // instruction, because if a user is in the same block as an instruction we're
1707   // contemplating sinking, it must already be determined to be sinkable.
1708   if (HasUse) {
1709     auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1710     auto *Succ = I0->getParent()->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1711     if (!all_of(Insts, [&PNUse,&Succ](const Instruction *I) -> bool {
1712           auto *U = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
1713           return (PNUse &&
1714                   PNUse->getParent() == Succ &&
1715                   PNUse->getIncomingValueForBlock(I->getParent()) == I) ||
1716                  U->getParent() == I->getParent();
1717         }))
1718       return false;
1719   }
1720 
1721   // Because SROA can't handle speculating stores of selects, try not to sink
1722   // loads, stores or lifetime markers of allocas when we'd have to create a
1723   // PHI for the address operand. Also, because it is likely that loads or
1724   // stores of allocas will disappear when Mem2Reg/SROA is run, don't sink
1725   // them.
1726   // This can cause code churn which can have unintended consequences down
1727   // the line - see https://llvm.org/bugs/show_bug.cgi?id=30244.
1728   // FIXME: This is a workaround for a deficiency in SROA - see
1729   // https://llvm.org/bugs/show_bug.cgi?id=30188
1730   if (isa<StoreInst>(I0) && any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
1731         return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(1)->stripPointerCasts());
1732       }))
1733     return false;
1734   if (isa<LoadInst>(I0) && any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
1735         return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(0)->stripPointerCasts());
1736       }))
1737     return false;
1738   if (isLifeTimeMarker(I0) && any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
1739         return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(1)->stripPointerCasts());
1740       }))
1741     return false;
1742 
1743   // For calls to be sinkable, they must all be indirect, or have same callee.
1744   // I.e. if we have two direct calls to different callees, we don't want to
1745   // turn that into an indirect call. Likewise, if we have an indirect call,
1746   // and a direct call, we don't actually want to have a single indirect call.
1747   if (isa<CallBase>(I0)) {
1748     auto IsIndirectCall = [](const Instruction *I) {
1749       return cast<CallBase>(I)->isIndirectCall();
1750     };
1751     bool HaveIndirectCalls = any_of(Insts, IsIndirectCall);
1752     bool AllCallsAreIndirect = all_of(Insts, IsIndirectCall);
1753     if (HaveIndirectCalls) {
1754       if (!AllCallsAreIndirect)
1755         return false;
1756     } else {
1757       // All callees must be identical.
1758       Value *Callee = nullptr;
1759       for (const Instruction *I : Insts) {
1760         Value *CurrCallee = cast<CallBase>(I)->getCalledOperand();
1761         if (!Callee)
1762           Callee = CurrCallee;
1763         else if (Callee != CurrCallee)
1764           return false;
1765       }
1766     }
1767   }
1768 
1769   for (unsigned OI = 0, OE = I0->getNumOperands(); OI != OE; ++OI) {
1770     Value *Op = I0->getOperand(OI);
1771     if (Op->getType()->isTokenTy())
1772       // Don't touch any operand of token type.
1773       return false;
1774 
1775     auto SameAsI0 = [&I0, OI](const Instruction *I) {
1776       assert(I->getNumOperands() == I0->getNumOperands());
1777       return I->getOperand(OI) == I0->getOperand(OI);
1778     };
1779     if (!all_of(Insts, SameAsI0)) {
1780       if ((isa<Constant>(Op) && !replacingOperandWithVariableIsCheap(I0, OI)) ||
1781           !canReplaceOperandWithVariable(I0, OI))
1782         // We can't create a PHI from this GEP.
1783         return false;
1784       for (auto *I : Insts)
1785         PHIOperands[I].push_back(I->getOperand(OI));
1786     }
1787   }
1788   return true;
1789 }
1790 
1791 // Assuming canSinkInstructions(Blocks) has returned true, sink the last
1792 // instruction of every block in Blocks to their common successor, commoning
1793 // into one instruction.
1794 static bool sinkLastInstruction(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) {
1795   auto *BBEnd = Blocks[0]->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1796 
1797   // canSinkInstructions returning true guarantees that every block has at
1798   // least one non-terminator instruction.
1799   SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
1800   for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
1801     Instruction *I = BB->getTerminator();
1802     do {
1803       I = I->getPrevNode();
1804     } while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) && I != &BB->front());
1805     if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1806       Insts.push_back(I);
1807   }
1808 
1809   // The only checking we need to do now is that all users of all instructions
1810   // are the same PHI node. canSinkInstructions should have checked this but
1811   // it is slightly over-aggressive - it gets confused by commutative
1812   // instructions so double-check it here.
1813   Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
1814   if (!I0->user_empty()) {
1815     auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1816     if (!all_of(Insts, [&PNUse](const Instruction *I) -> bool {
1817           auto *U = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
1818           return U == PNUse;
1819         }))
1820       return false;
1821   }
1822 
1823   // We don't need to do any more checking here; canSinkInstructions should
1824   // have done it all for us.
1825   SmallVector<Value*, 4> NewOperands;
1826   for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O) {
1827     // This check is different to that in canSinkInstructions. There, we
1828     // cared about the global view once simplifycfg (and instcombine) have
1829     // completed - it takes into account PHIs that become trivially
1830     // simplifiable.  However here we need a more local view; if an operand
1831     // differs we create a PHI and rely on instcombine to clean up the very
1832     // small mess we may make.
1833     bool NeedPHI = any_of(Insts, [&I0, O](const Instruction *I) {
1834       return I->getOperand(O) != I0->getOperand(O);
1835     });
1836     if (!NeedPHI) {
1837       NewOperands.push_back(I0->getOperand(O));
1838       continue;
1839     }
1840 
1841     // Create a new PHI in the successor block and populate it.
1842     auto *Op = I0->getOperand(O);
1843     assert(!Op->getType()->isTokenTy() && "Can't PHI tokens!");
1844     auto *PN = PHINode::Create(Op->getType(), Insts.size(),
1845                                Op->getName() + ".sink", &BBEnd->front());
1846     for (auto *I : Insts)
1847       PN->addIncoming(I->getOperand(O), I->getParent());
1848     NewOperands.push_back(PN);
1849   }
1850 
1851   // Arbitrarily use I0 as the new "common" instruction; remap its operands
1852   // and move it to the start of the successor block.
1853   for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O)
1854     I0->getOperandUse(O).set(NewOperands[O]);
1855   I0->moveBefore(&*BBEnd->getFirstInsertionPt());
1856 
1857   // Update metadata and IR flags, and merge debug locations.
1858   for (auto *I : Insts)
1859     if (I != I0) {
1860       // The debug location for the "common" instruction is the merged locations
1861       // of all the commoned instructions.  We start with the original location
1862       // of the "common" instruction and iteratively merge each location in the
1863       // loop below.
1864       // This is an N-way merge, which will be inefficient if I0 is a CallInst.
1865       // However, as N-way merge for CallInst is rare, so we use simplified API
1866       // instead of using complex API for N-way merge.
1867       I0->applyMergedLocation(I0->getDebugLoc(), I->getDebugLoc());
1868       combineMetadataForCSE(I0, I, true);
1869       I0->andIRFlags(I);
1870     }
1871 
1872   if (!I0->user_empty()) {
1873     // canSinkLastInstruction checked that all instructions were used by
1874     // one and only one PHI node. Find that now, RAUW it to our common
1875     // instruction and nuke it.
1876     auto *PN = cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1877     PN->replaceAllUsesWith(I0);
1878     PN->eraseFromParent();
1879   }
1880 
1881   // Finally nuke all instructions apart from the common instruction.
1882   for (auto *I : Insts)
1883     if (I != I0)
1884       I->eraseFromParent();
1885 
1886   return true;
1887 }
1888 
1889 namespace {
1890 
1891   // LockstepReverseIterator - Iterates through instructions
1892   // in a set of blocks in reverse order from the first non-terminator.
1893   // For example (assume all blocks have size n):
1894   //   LockstepReverseIterator I([B1, B2, B3]);
1895   //   *I-- = [B1[n], B2[n], B3[n]];
1896   //   *I-- = [B1[n-1], B2[n-1], B3[n-1]];
1897   //   *I-- = [B1[n-2], B2[n-2], B3[n-2]];
1898   //   ...
1899   class LockstepReverseIterator {
1900     ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks;
1901     SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
1902     bool Fail;
1903 
1904   public:
1905     LockstepReverseIterator(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) : Blocks(Blocks) {
1906       reset();
1907     }
1908 
1909     void reset() {
1910       Fail = false;
1911       Insts.clear();
1912       for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
1913         Instruction *Inst = BB->getTerminator();
1914         for (Inst = Inst->getPrevNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
1915           Inst = Inst->getPrevNode();
1916         if (!Inst) {
1917           // Block wasn't big enough.
1918           Fail = true;
1919           return;
1920         }
1921         Insts.push_back(Inst);
1922       }
1923     }
1924 
1925     bool isValid() const {
1926       return !Fail;
1927     }
1928 
1929     void operator--() {
1930       if (Fail)
1931         return;
1932       for (auto *&Inst : Insts) {
1933         for (Inst = Inst->getPrevNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
1934           Inst = Inst->getPrevNode();
1935         // Already at beginning of block.
1936         if (!Inst) {
1937           Fail = true;
1938           return;
1939         }
1940       }
1941     }
1942 
1943     void operator++() {
1944       if (Fail)
1945         return;
1946       for (auto *&Inst : Insts) {
1947         for (Inst = Inst->getNextNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
1948           Inst = Inst->getNextNode();
1949         // Already at end of block.
1950         if (!Inst) {
1951           Fail = true;
1952           return;
1953         }
1954       }
1955     }
1956 
1957     ArrayRef<Instruction*> operator * () const {
1958       return Insts;
1959     }
1960   };
1961 
1962 } // end anonymous namespace
1963 
1964 /// Check whether BB's predecessors end with unconditional branches. If it is
1965 /// true, sink any common code from the predecessors to BB.
1966 static bool SinkCommonCodeFromPredecessors(BasicBlock *BB,
1967                                            DomTreeUpdater *DTU) {
1968   // We support two situations:
1969   //   (1) all incoming arcs are unconditional
1970   //   (2) there are non-unconditional incoming arcs
1971   //
1972   // (2) is very common in switch defaults and
1973   // else-if patterns;
1974   //
1975   //   if (a) f(1);
1976   //   else if (b) f(2);
1977   //
1978   // produces:
1979   //
1980   //       [if]
1981   //      /    \
1982   //    [f(1)] [if]
1983   //      |     | \
1984   //      |     |  |
1985   //      |  [f(2)]|
1986   //       \    | /
1987   //        [ end ]
1988   //
1989   // [end] has two unconditional predecessor arcs and one conditional. The
1990   // conditional refers to the implicit empty 'else' arc. This conditional
1991   // arc can also be caused by an empty default block in a switch.
1992   //
1993   // In this case, we attempt to sink code from all *unconditional* arcs.
1994   // If we can sink instructions from these arcs (determined during the scan
1995   // phase below) we insert a common successor for all unconditional arcs and
1996   // connect that to [end], to enable sinking:
1997   //
1998   //       [if]
1999   //      /    \
2000   //    [x(1)] [if]
2001   //      |     | \
2002   //      |     |  \
2003   //      |  [x(2)] |
2004   //       \   /    |
2005   //   [sink.split] |
2006   //         \     /
2007   //         [ end ]
2008   //
2009   SmallVector<BasicBlock*,4> UnconditionalPreds;
2010   bool HaveNonUnconditionalPredecessors = false;
2011   for (auto *PredBB : predecessors(BB)) {
2012     auto *PredBr = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBB->getTerminator());
2013     if (PredBr && PredBr->isUnconditional())
2014       UnconditionalPreds.push_back(PredBB);
2015     else
2016       HaveNonUnconditionalPredecessors = true;
2017   }
2018   if (UnconditionalPreds.size() < 2)
2019     return false;
2020 
2021   // We take a two-step approach to tail sinking. First we scan from the end of
2022   // each block upwards in lockstep. If the n'th instruction from the end of each
2023   // block can be sunk, those instructions are added to ValuesToSink and we
2024   // carry on. If we can sink an instruction but need to PHI-merge some operands
2025   // (because they're not identical in each instruction) we add these to
2026   // PHIOperands.
2027   int ScanIdx = 0;
2028   SmallPtrSet<Value*,4> InstructionsToSink;
2029   DenseMap<Instruction*, SmallVector<Value*,4>> PHIOperands;
2030   LockstepReverseIterator LRI(UnconditionalPreds);
2031   while (LRI.isValid() &&
2032          canSinkInstructions(*LRI, PHIOperands)) {
2033     LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: instruction can be sunk: " << *(*LRI)[0]
2034                       << "\n");
2035     InstructionsToSink.insert((*LRI).begin(), (*LRI).end());
2036     ++ScanIdx;
2037     --LRI;
2038   }
2039 
2040   // If no instructions can be sunk, early-return.
2041   if (ScanIdx == 0)
2042     return false;
2043 
2044   // Okay, we *could* sink last ScanIdx instructions. But how many can we
2045   // actually sink before encountering instruction that is unprofitable to sink?
2046   auto ProfitableToSinkInstruction = [&](LockstepReverseIterator &LRI) {
2047     unsigned NumPHIdValues = 0;
2048     for (auto *I : *LRI)
2049       for (auto *V : PHIOperands[I]) {
2050         if (InstructionsToSink.count(V) == 0)
2051           ++NumPHIdValues;
2052         // FIXME: this check is overly optimistic. We may end up not sinking
2053         // said instruction, due to the very same profitability check.
2054         // See @creating_too_many_phis in sink-common-code.ll.
2055       }
2056     LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: #phid values: " << NumPHIdValues << "\n");
2057     unsigned NumPHIInsts = NumPHIdValues / UnconditionalPreds.size();
2058     if ((NumPHIdValues % UnconditionalPreds.size()) != 0)
2059         NumPHIInsts++;
2060 
2061     return NumPHIInsts <= 1;
2062   };
2063 
2064   // We've determined that we are going to sink last ScanIdx instructions,
2065   // and recorded them in InstructionsToSink. Now, some instructions may be
2066   // unprofitable to sink. But that determination depends on the instructions
2067   // that we are going to sink.
2068 
2069   // First, forward scan: find the first instruction unprofitable to sink,
2070   // recording all the ones that are profitable to sink.
2071   // FIXME: would it be better, after we detect that not all are profitable.
2072   // to either record the profitable ones, or erase the unprofitable ones?
2073   // Maybe we need to choose (at runtime) the one that will touch least instrs?
2074   LRI.reset();
2075   int Idx = 0;
2076   SmallPtrSet<Value *, 4> InstructionsProfitableToSink;
2077   while (Idx < ScanIdx) {
2078     if (!ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI)) {
2079       // Too many PHIs would be created.
2080       LLVM_DEBUG(
2081           dbgs() << "SINK: stopping here, too many PHIs would be created!\n");
2082       break;
2083     }
2084     InstructionsProfitableToSink.insert((*LRI).begin(), (*LRI).end());
2085     --LRI;
2086     ++Idx;
2087   }
2088 
2089   // If no instructions can be sunk, early-return.
2090   if (Idx == 0)
2091     return false;
2092 
2093   // Did we determine that (only) some instructions are unprofitable to sink?
2094   if (Idx < ScanIdx) {
2095     // Okay, some instructions are unprofitable.
2096     ScanIdx = Idx;
2097     InstructionsToSink = InstructionsProfitableToSink;
2098 
2099     // But, that may make other instructions unprofitable, too.
2100     // So, do a backward scan, do any earlier instructions become unprofitable?
2101     assert(!ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI) &&
2102            "We already know that the last instruction is unprofitable to sink");
2103     ++LRI;
2104     --Idx;
2105     while (Idx >= 0) {
2106       // If we detect that an instruction becomes unprofitable to sink,
2107       // all earlier instructions won't be sunk either,
2108       // so preemptively keep InstructionsProfitableToSink in sync.
2109       // FIXME: is this the most performant approach?
2110       for (auto *I : *LRI)
2111         InstructionsProfitableToSink.erase(I);
2112       if (!ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI)) {
2113         // Everything starting with this instruction won't be sunk.
2114         ScanIdx = Idx;
2115         InstructionsToSink = InstructionsProfitableToSink;
2116       }
2117       ++LRI;
2118       --Idx;
2119     }
2120   }
2121 
2122   // If no instructions can be sunk, early-return.
2123   if (ScanIdx == 0)
2124     return false;
2125 
2126   bool Changed = false;
2127 
2128   if (HaveNonUnconditionalPredecessors) {
2129     // It is always legal to sink common instructions from unconditional
2130     // predecessors. However, if not all predecessors are unconditional,
2131     // this transformation might be pessimizing. So as a rule of thumb,
2132     // don't do it unless we'd sink at least one non-speculatable instruction.
2133     // See https://bugs.llvm.org/show_bug.cgi?id=30244
2134     LRI.reset();
2135     int Idx = 0;
2136     bool Profitable = false;
2137     while (Idx < ScanIdx) {
2138       if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute((*LRI)[0])) {
2139         Profitable = true;
2140         break;
2141       }
2142       --LRI;
2143       ++Idx;
2144     }
2145     if (!Profitable)
2146       return false;
2147 
2148     LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: Splitting edge\n");
2149     // We have a conditional edge and we're going to sink some instructions.
2150     // Insert a new block postdominating all blocks we're going to sink from.
2151     if (!SplitBlockPredecessors(BB, UnconditionalPreds, ".sink.split", DTU))
2152       // Edges couldn't be split.
2153       return false;
2154     Changed = true;
2155   }
2156 
2157   // Now that we've analyzed all potential sinking candidates, perform the
2158   // actual sink. We iteratively sink the last non-terminator of the source
2159   // blocks into their common successor unless doing so would require too
2160   // many PHI instructions to be generated (currently only one PHI is allowed
2161   // per sunk instruction).
2162   //
2163   // We can use InstructionsToSink to discount values needing PHI-merging that will
2164   // actually be sunk in a later iteration. This allows us to be more
2165   // aggressive in what we sink. This does allow a false positive where we
2166   // sink presuming a later value will also be sunk, but stop half way through
2167   // and never actually sink it which means we produce more PHIs than intended.
2168   // This is unlikely in practice though.
2169   int SinkIdx = 0;
2170   for (; SinkIdx != ScanIdx; ++SinkIdx) {
2171     LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: Sink: "
2172                       << *UnconditionalPreds[0]->getTerminator()->getPrevNode()
2173                       << "\n");
2174 
2175     // Because we've sunk every instruction in turn, the current instruction to
2176     // sink is always at index 0.
2177     LRI.reset();
2178 
2179     if (!sinkLastInstruction(UnconditionalPreds)) {
2180       LLVM_DEBUG(
2181           dbgs()
2182           << "SINK: stopping here, failed to actually sink instruction!\n");
2183       break;
2184     }
2185 
2186     NumSinkCommonInstrs++;
2187     Changed = true;
2188   }
2189   if (SinkIdx != 0)
2190     ++NumSinkCommonCode;
2191   return Changed;
2192 }
2193 
2194 /// Determine if we can hoist sink a sole store instruction out of a
2195 /// conditional block.
2196 ///
2197 /// We are looking for code like the following:
2198 ///   BrBB:
2199 ///     store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
2200 ///     ... // No other stores or function calls (we could be calling a memory
2201 ///     ... // function).
2202 ///     %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
2203 ///     br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
2204 ///   ThenBB:
2205 ///     store i32 %add5, i32* %arrayidx2
2206 ///     br label EndBB
2207 ///   EndBB:
2208 ///     ...
2209 ///   We are going to transform this into:
2210 ///   BrBB:
2211 ///     store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
2212 ///     ... //
2213 ///     %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
2214 ///     %add.add5 = select i1 %cmp, i32 %add, %add5
2215 ///     store i32 %add.add5, i32* %arrayidx2
2216 ///     ...
2217 ///
2218 /// \return The pointer to the value of the previous store if the store can be
2219 ///         hoisted into the predecessor block. 0 otherwise.
2220 static Value *isSafeToSpeculateStore(Instruction *I, BasicBlock *BrBB,
2221                                      BasicBlock *StoreBB, BasicBlock *EndBB) {
2222   StoreInst *StoreToHoist = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I);
2223   if (!StoreToHoist)
2224     return nullptr;
2225 
2226   // Volatile or atomic.
2227   if (!StoreToHoist->isSimple())
2228     return nullptr;
2229 
2230   Value *StorePtr = StoreToHoist->getPointerOperand();
2231 
2232   // Look for a store to the same pointer in BrBB.
2233   unsigned MaxNumInstToLookAt = 9;
2234   // Skip pseudo probe intrinsic calls which are not really killing any memory
2235   // accesses.
2236   for (Instruction &CurI : reverse(BrBB->instructionsWithoutDebug(true))) {
2237     if (!MaxNumInstToLookAt)
2238       break;
2239     --MaxNumInstToLookAt;
2240 
2241     // Could be calling an instruction that affects memory like free().
2242     if (CurI.mayHaveSideEffects() && !isa<StoreInst>(CurI))
2243       return nullptr;
2244 
2245     if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&CurI)) {
2246       // Found the previous store make sure it stores to the same location.
2247       if (SI->getPointerOperand() == StorePtr)
2248         // Found the previous store, return its value operand.
2249         return SI->getValueOperand();
2250       return nullptr; // Unknown store.
2251     }
2252   }
2253 
2254   return nullptr;
2255 }
2256 
2257 /// Estimate the cost of the insertion(s) and check that the PHI nodes can be
2258 /// converted to selects.
2259 static bool validateAndCostRequiredSelects(BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
2260                                            BasicBlock *EndBB,
2261                                            unsigned &SpeculatedInstructions,
2262                                            InstructionCost &Cost,
2263                                            const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
2264   TargetTransformInfo::TargetCostKind CostKind =
2265     BB->getParent()->hasMinSize()
2266     ? TargetTransformInfo::TCK_CodeSize
2267     : TargetTransformInfo::TCK_SizeAndLatency;
2268 
2269   bool HaveRewritablePHIs = false;
2270   for (PHINode &PN : EndBB->phis()) {
2271     Value *OrigV = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2272     Value *ThenV = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(ThenBB);
2273 
2274     // FIXME: Try to remove some of the duplication with HoistThenElseCodeToIf.
2275     // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
2276     if (ThenV == OrigV)
2277       continue;
2278 
2279     Cost += TTI.getCmpSelInstrCost(Instruction::Select, PN.getType(), nullptr,
2280                                    CmpInst::BAD_ICMP_PREDICATE, CostKind);
2281 
2282     // Don't convert to selects if we could remove undefined behavior instead.
2283     if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(OrigV, &PN) ||
2284         passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(ThenV, &PN))
2285       return false;
2286 
2287     HaveRewritablePHIs = true;
2288     ConstantExpr *OrigCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(OrigV);
2289     ConstantExpr *ThenCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(ThenV);
2290     if (!OrigCE && !ThenCE)
2291       continue; // Known safe and cheap.
2292 
2293     if ((ThenCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(ThenCE)) ||
2294         (OrigCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(OrigCE)))
2295       return false;
2296     InstructionCost OrigCost = OrigCE ? computeSpeculationCost(OrigCE, TTI) : 0;
2297     InstructionCost ThenCost = ThenCE ? computeSpeculationCost(ThenCE, TTI) : 0;
2298     InstructionCost MaxCost =
2299         2 * PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
2300     if (OrigCost + ThenCost > MaxCost)
2301       return false;
2302 
2303     // Account for the cost of an unfolded ConstantExpr which could end up
2304     // getting expanded into Instructions.
2305     // FIXME: This doesn't account for how many operations are combined in the
2306     // constant expression.
2307     ++SpeculatedInstructions;
2308     if (SpeculatedInstructions > 1)
2309       return false;
2310   }
2311 
2312   return HaveRewritablePHIs;
2313 }
2314 
2315 /// Speculate a conditional basic block flattening the CFG.
2316 ///
2317 /// Note that this is a very risky transform currently. Speculating
2318 /// instructions like this is most often not desirable. Instead, there is an MI
2319 /// pass which can do it with full awareness of the resource constraints.
2320 /// However, some cases are "obvious" and we should do directly. An example of
2321 /// this is speculating a single, reasonably cheap instruction.
2322 ///
2323 /// There is only one distinct advantage to flattening the CFG at the IR level:
2324 /// it makes very common but simplistic optimizations such as are common in
2325 /// instcombine and the DAG combiner more powerful by removing CFG edges and
2326 /// modeling their effects with easier to reason about SSA value graphs.
2327 ///
2328 ///
2329 /// An illustration of this transform is turning this IR:
2330 /// \code
2331 ///   BB:
2332 ///     %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
2333 ///     br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
2334 ///   ThenBB:
2335 ///     %sub = sub %x, %y
2336 ///     br label BB2
2337 ///   EndBB:
2338 ///     %phi = phi [ %sub, %ThenBB ], [ 0, %EndBB ]
2339 ///     ...
2340 /// \endcode
2341 ///
2342 /// Into this IR:
2343 /// \code
2344 ///   BB:
2345 ///     %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
2346 ///     %sub = sub %x, %y
2347 ///     %cond = select i1 %cmp, 0, %sub
2348 ///     ...
2349 /// \endcode
2350 ///
2351 /// \returns true if the conditional block is removed.
2352 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
2353                                             const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
2354   // Be conservative for now. FP select instruction can often be expensive.
2355   Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
2356   if (isa<FCmpInst>(BrCond))
2357     return false;
2358 
2359   BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
2360   BasicBlock *EndBB = ThenBB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
2361   InstructionCost Budget =
2362       PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
2363 
2364   // If ThenBB is actually on the false edge of the conditional branch, remember
2365   // to swap the select operands later.
2366   bool Invert = false;
2367   if (ThenBB != BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
2368     assert(ThenBB == BI->getSuccessor(1) && "No edge from 'if' block?");
2369     Invert = true;
2370   }
2371   assert(EndBB == BI->getSuccessor(!Invert) && "No edge from to end block");
2372 
2373   // Keep a count of how many times instructions are used within ThenBB when
2374   // they are candidates for sinking into ThenBB. Specifically:
2375   // - They are defined in BB, and
2376   // - They have no side effects, and
2377   // - All of their uses are in ThenBB.
2378   SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4> SinkCandidateUseCounts;
2379 
2380   SmallVector<Instruction *, 4> SpeculatedDbgIntrinsics;
2381 
2382   unsigned SpeculatedInstructions = 0;
2383   Value *SpeculatedStoreValue = nullptr;
2384   StoreInst *SpeculatedStore = nullptr;
2385   for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = ThenBB->begin(),
2386                             BBE = std::prev(ThenBB->end());
2387        BBI != BBE; ++BBI) {
2388     Instruction *I = &*BBI;
2389     // Skip debug info.
2390     if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
2391       SpeculatedDbgIntrinsics.push_back(I);
2392       continue;
2393     }
2394 
2395     // Skip pseudo probes. The consequence is we lose track of the branch
2396     // probability for ThenBB, which is fine since the optimization here takes
2397     // place regardless of the branch probability.
2398     if (isa<PseudoProbeInst>(I)) {
2399       // The probe should be deleted so that it will not be over-counted when
2400       // the samples collected on the non-conditional path are counted towards
2401       // the conditional path. We leave it for the counts inference algorithm to
2402       // figure out a proper count for an unknown probe.
2403       SpeculatedDbgIntrinsics.push_back(I);
2404       continue;
2405     }
2406 
2407     // Only speculatively execute a single instruction (not counting the
2408     // terminator) for now.
2409     ++SpeculatedInstructions;
2410     if (SpeculatedInstructions > 1)
2411       return false;
2412 
2413     // Don't hoist the instruction if it's unsafe or expensive.
2414     if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
2415         !(HoistCondStores && (SpeculatedStoreValue = isSafeToSpeculateStore(
2416                                   I, BB, ThenBB, EndBB))))
2417       return false;
2418     if (!SpeculatedStoreValue &&
2419         computeSpeculationCost(I, TTI) >
2420             PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic)
2421       return false;
2422 
2423     // Store the store speculation candidate.
2424     if (SpeculatedStoreValue)
2425       SpeculatedStore = cast<StoreInst>(I);
2426 
2427     // Do not hoist the instruction if any of its operands are defined but not
2428     // used in BB. The transformation will prevent the operand from
2429     // being sunk into the use block.
2430     for (Use &Op : I->operands()) {
2431       Instruction *OpI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Op);
2432       if (!OpI || OpI->getParent() != BB || OpI->mayHaveSideEffects())
2433         continue; // Not a candidate for sinking.
2434 
2435       ++SinkCandidateUseCounts[OpI];
2436     }
2437   }
2438 
2439   // Consider any sink candidates which are only used in ThenBB as costs for
2440   // speculation. Note, while we iterate over a DenseMap here, we are summing
2441   // and so iteration order isn't significant.
2442   for (SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4>::iterator
2443            I = SinkCandidateUseCounts.begin(),
2444            E = SinkCandidateUseCounts.end();
2445        I != E; ++I)
2446     if (I->first->hasNUses(I->second)) {
2447       ++SpeculatedInstructions;
2448       if (SpeculatedInstructions > 1)
2449         return false;
2450     }
2451 
2452   // Check that we can insert the selects and that it's not too expensive to do
2453   // so.
2454   bool Convert = SpeculatedStore != nullptr;
2455   InstructionCost Cost = 0;
2456   Convert |= validateAndCostRequiredSelects(BB, ThenBB, EndBB,
2457                                             SpeculatedInstructions,
2458                                             Cost, TTI);
2459   if (!Convert || Cost > Budget)
2460     return false;
2461 
2462   // If we get here, we can hoist the instruction and if-convert.
2463   LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SPECULATIVELY EXECUTING BB" << *ThenBB << "\n";);
2464 
2465   // Insert a select of the value of the speculated store.
2466   if (SpeculatedStoreValue) {
2467     IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
2468     Value *TrueV = SpeculatedStore->getValueOperand();
2469     Value *FalseV = SpeculatedStoreValue;
2470     if (Invert)
2471       std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
2472     Value *S = Builder.CreateSelect(
2473         BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, "spec.store.select", BI);
2474     SpeculatedStore->setOperand(0, S);
2475     SpeculatedStore->applyMergedLocation(BI->getDebugLoc(),
2476                                          SpeculatedStore->getDebugLoc());
2477   }
2478 
2479   // Metadata can be dependent on the condition we are hoisting above.
2480   // Conservatively strip all metadata on the instruction. Drop the debug loc
2481   // to avoid making it appear as if the condition is a constant, which would
2482   // be misleading while debugging.
2483   for (auto &I : *ThenBB) {
2484     if (!SpeculatedStoreValue || &I != SpeculatedStore)
2485       I.setDebugLoc(DebugLoc());
2486     I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
2487   }
2488 
2489   // Hoist the instructions.
2490   BB->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), ThenBB->getInstList(),
2491                            ThenBB->begin(), std::prev(ThenBB->end()));
2492 
2493   // Insert selects and rewrite the PHI operands.
2494   IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
2495   for (PHINode &PN : EndBB->phis()) {
2496     unsigned OrigI = PN.getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
2497     unsigned ThenI = PN.getBasicBlockIndex(ThenBB);
2498     Value *OrigV = PN.getIncomingValue(OrigI);
2499     Value *ThenV = PN.getIncomingValue(ThenI);
2500 
2501     // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
2502     if (OrigV == ThenV)
2503       continue;
2504 
2505     // Create a select whose true value is the speculatively executed value and
2506     // false value is the pre-existing value. Swap them if the branch
2507     // destinations were inverted.
2508     Value *TrueV = ThenV, *FalseV = OrigV;
2509     if (Invert)
2510       std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
2511     Value *V = Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, "spec.select", BI);
2512     PN.setIncomingValue(OrigI, V);
2513     PN.setIncomingValue(ThenI, V);
2514   }
2515 
2516   // Remove speculated dbg intrinsics.
2517   // FIXME: Is it possible to do this in a more elegant way? Moving/merging the
2518   // dbg value for the different flows and inserting it after the select.
2519   for (Instruction *I : SpeculatedDbgIntrinsics)
2520     I->eraseFromParent();
2521 
2522   ++NumSpeculations;
2523   return true;
2524 }
2525 
2526 /// Return true if we can thread a branch across this block.
2527 static bool BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BasicBlock *BB) {
2528   int Size = 0;
2529 
2530   SmallPtrSet<const Value *, 32> EphValues;
2531   auto IsEphemeral = [&](const Value *V) {
2532     if (isa<AssumeInst>(V))
2533       return true;
2534     return isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(V) &&
2535            all_of(V->users(),
2536                   [&](const User *U) { return EphValues.count(U); });
2537   };
2538 
2539   // Walk the loop in reverse so that we can identify ephemeral values properly
2540   // (values only feeding assumes).
2541   for (Instruction &I : reverse(BB->instructionsWithoutDebug())) {
2542     // Can't fold blocks that contain noduplicate or convergent calls.
2543     if (CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(&I))
2544       if (CI->cannotDuplicate() || CI->isConvergent())
2545         return false;
2546 
2547     // Ignore ephemeral values which are deleted during codegen.
2548     if (IsEphemeral(&I))
2549       EphValues.insert(&I);
2550     // We will delete Phis while threading, so Phis should not be accounted in
2551     // block's size.
2552     else if (!isa<PHINode>(I)) {
2553       if (Size++ > MaxSmallBlockSize)
2554         return false; // Don't clone large BB's.
2555     }
2556 
2557     // We can only support instructions that do not define values that are
2558     // live outside of the current basic block.
2559     for (User *U : I.users()) {
2560       Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
2561       if (UI->getParent() != BB || isa<PHINode>(UI))
2562         return false;
2563     }
2564 
2565     // Looks ok, continue checking.
2566   }
2567 
2568   return true;
2569 }
2570 
2571 /// If we have a conditional branch on a PHI node value that is defined in the
2572 /// same block as the branch and if any PHI entries are constants, thread edges
2573 /// corresponding to that entry to be branches to their ultimate destination.
2574 static bool FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BranchInst *BI, DomTreeUpdater *DTU,
2575                                 const DataLayout &DL, AssumptionCache *AC) {
2576   BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
2577   PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition());
2578   // NOTE: we currently cannot transform this case if the PHI node is used
2579   // outside of the block.
2580   if (!PN || PN->getParent() != BB || !PN->hasOneUse())
2581     return false;
2582 
2583   // Degenerate case of a single entry PHI.
2584   if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 1) {
2585     FoldSingleEntryPHINodes(PN->getParent());
2586     return true;
2587   }
2588 
2589   // Now we know that this block has multiple preds and two succs.
2590   if (!BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB))
2591     return false;
2592 
2593   // Okay, this is a simple enough basic block.  See if any phi values are
2594   // constants.
2595   for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) {
2596     ConstantInt *CB = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValue(i));
2597     if (!CB || !CB->getType()->isIntegerTy(1))
2598       continue;
2599 
2600     // Okay, we now know that all edges from PredBB should be revectored to
2601     // branch to RealDest.
2602     BasicBlock *PredBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(i);
2603     BasicBlock *RealDest = BI->getSuccessor(!CB->getZExtValue());
2604 
2605     if (RealDest == BB)
2606       continue; // Skip self loops.
2607     // Skip if the predecessor's terminator is an indirect branch.
2608     if (isa<IndirectBrInst>(PredBB->getTerminator()))
2609       continue;
2610 
2611     SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 3> Updates;
2612 
2613     // The dest block might have PHI nodes, other predecessors and other
2614     // difficult cases.  Instead of being smart about this, just insert a new
2615     // block that jumps to the destination block, effectively splitting
2616     // the edge we are about to create.
2617     BasicBlock *EdgeBB =
2618         BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), RealDest->getName() + ".critedge",
2619                            RealDest->getParent(), RealDest);
2620     BranchInst *CritEdgeBranch = BranchInst::Create(RealDest, EdgeBB);
2621     if (DTU)
2622       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, EdgeBB, RealDest});
2623     CritEdgeBranch->setDebugLoc(BI->getDebugLoc());
2624 
2625     // Update PHI nodes.
2626     AddPredecessorToBlock(RealDest, EdgeBB, BB);
2627 
2628     // BB may have instructions that are being threaded over.  Clone these
2629     // instructions into EdgeBB.  We know that there will be no uses of the
2630     // cloned instructions outside of EdgeBB.
2631     BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = EdgeBB->begin();
2632     DenseMap<Value *, Value *> TranslateMap; // Track translated values.
2633     for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
2634       if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)) {
2635         TranslateMap[PN] = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(PredBB);
2636         continue;
2637       }
2638       // Clone the instruction.
2639       Instruction *N = BBI->clone();
2640       if (BBI->hasName())
2641         N->setName(BBI->getName() + ".c");
2642 
2643       // Update operands due to translation.
2644       for (Use &Op : N->operands()) {
2645         DenseMap<Value *, Value *>::iterator PI = TranslateMap.find(Op);
2646         if (PI != TranslateMap.end())
2647           Op = PI->second;
2648       }
2649 
2650       // Check for trivial simplification.
2651       if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(N, {DL, nullptr, nullptr, AC})) {
2652         if (!BBI->use_empty())
2653           TranslateMap[&*BBI] = V;
2654         if (!N->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
2655           N->deleteValue(); // Instruction folded away, don't need actual inst
2656           N = nullptr;
2657         }
2658       } else {
2659         if (!BBI->use_empty())
2660           TranslateMap[&*BBI] = N;
2661       }
2662       if (N) {
2663         // Insert the new instruction into its new home.
2664         EdgeBB->getInstList().insert(InsertPt, N);
2665 
2666         // Register the new instruction with the assumption cache if necessary.
2667         if (auto *Assume = dyn_cast<AssumeInst>(N))
2668           if (AC)
2669             AC->registerAssumption(Assume);
2670       }
2671     }
2672 
2673     // Loop over all of the edges from PredBB to BB, changing them to branch
2674     // to EdgeBB instead.
2675     Instruction *PredBBTI = PredBB->getTerminator();
2676     for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredBBTI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
2677       if (PredBBTI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
2678         BB->removePredecessor(PredBB);
2679         PredBBTI->setSuccessor(i, EdgeBB);
2680       }
2681 
2682     if (DTU) {
2683       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, PredBB, EdgeBB});
2684       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, PredBB, BB});
2685 
2686       DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
2687     }
2688 
2689     // Recurse, simplifying any other constants.
2690     return FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DTU, DL, AC) || true;
2691   }
2692 
2693   return false;
2694 }
2695 
2696 /// Given a BB that starts with the specified two-entry PHI node,
2697 /// see if we can eliminate it.
2698 static bool FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PHINode *PN, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
2699                                 DomTreeUpdater *DTU, const DataLayout &DL) {
2700   // Ok, this is a two entry PHI node.  Check to see if this is a simple "if
2701   // statement", which has a very simple dominance structure.  Basically, we
2702   // are trying to find the condition that is being branched on, which
2703   // subsequently causes this merge to happen.  We really want control
2704   // dependence information for this check, but simplifycfg can't keep it up
2705   // to date, and this catches most of the cases we care about anyway.
2706   BasicBlock *BB = PN->getParent();
2707 
2708   BasicBlock *IfTrue, *IfFalse;
2709   Value *IfCond = GetIfCondition(BB, IfTrue, IfFalse);
2710   if (!IfCond ||
2711       // Don't bother if the branch will be constant folded trivially.
2712       isa<ConstantInt>(IfCond))
2713     return false;
2714 
2715   // Don't try to fold an unreachable block. For example, the phi node itself
2716   // can't be the candidate if-condition for a select that we want to form.
2717   if (auto *IfCondPhiInst = dyn_cast<PHINode>(IfCond))
2718     if (IfCondPhiInst->getParent() == BB)
2719       return false;
2720 
2721   // Okay, we found that we can merge this two-entry phi node into a select.
2722   // Doing so would require us to fold *all* two entry phi nodes in this block.
2723   // At some point this becomes non-profitable (particularly if the target
2724   // doesn't support cmov's).  Only do this transformation if there are two or
2725   // fewer PHI nodes in this block.
2726   unsigned NumPhis = 0;
2727   for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++NumPhis, ++I)
2728     if (NumPhis > 2)
2729       return false;
2730 
2731   // Loop over the PHI's seeing if we can promote them all to select
2732   // instructions.  While we are at it, keep track of the instructions
2733   // that need to be moved to the dominating block.
2734   SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 4> AggressiveInsts;
2735   InstructionCost Cost = 0;
2736   InstructionCost Budget =
2737       TwoEntryPHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
2738 
2739   bool Changed = false;
2740   for (BasicBlock::iterator II = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);) {
2741     PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II++);
2742     if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(PN, {DL, PN})) {
2743       PN->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
2744       PN->eraseFromParent();
2745       Changed = true;
2746       continue;
2747     }
2748 
2749     if (!dominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(0), BB, AggressiveInsts,
2750                              Cost, Budget, TTI) ||
2751         !dominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(1), BB, AggressiveInsts,
2752                              Cost, Budget, TTI))
2753       return Changed;
2754   }
2755 
2756   // If we folded the first phi, PN dangles at this point.  Refresh it.  If
2757   // we ran out of PHIs then we simplified them all.
2758   PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin());
2759   if (!PN)
2760     return true;
2761 
2762   // Return true if at least one of these is a 'not', and another is either
2763   // a 'not' too, or a constant.
2764   auto CanHoistNotFromBothValues = [](Value *V0, Value *V1) {
2765     if (!match(V0, m_Not(m_Value())))
2766       std::swap(V0, V1);
2767     auto Invertible = m_CombineOr(m_Not(m_Value()), m_AnyIntegralConstant());
2768     return match(V0, m_Not(m_Value())) && match(V1, Invertible);
2769   };
2770 
2771   // Don't fold i1 branches on PHIs which contain binary operators or
2772   // select form of or/ands, unless one of the incoming values is an 'not' and
2773   // another one is freely invertible.
2774   // These can often be turned into switches and other things.
2775   auto IsBinOpOrAnd = [](Value *V) {
2776     return match(
2777         V, m_CombineOr(m_BinOp(), m_CombineOr(m_LogicalAnd(), m_LogicalOr())));
2778   };
2779   if (PN->getType()->isIntegerTy(1) &&
2780       (IsBinOpOrAnd(PN->getIncomingValue(0)) ||
2781        IsBinOpOrAnd(PN->getIncomingValue(1)) || IsBinOpOrAnd(IfCond)) &&
2782       !CanHoistNotFromBothValues(PN->getIncomingValue(0),
2783                                  PN->getIncomingValue(1)))
2784     return Changed;
2785 
2786   // If all PHI nodes are promotable, check to make sure that all instructions
2787   // in the predecessor blocks can be promoted as well. If not, we won't be able
2788   // to get rid of the control flow, so it's not worth promoting to select
2789   // instructions.
2790   BasicBlock *DomBlock = nullptr;
2791   BasicBlock *IfBlock1 = PN->getIncomingBlock(0);
2792   BasicBlock *IfBlock2 = PN->getIncomingBlock(1);
2793   if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock1->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
2794     IfBlock1 = nullptr;
2795   } else {
2796     DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock1);
2797     for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock1->begin(); !I->isTerminator(); ++I)
2798       if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) &&
2799           !isa<PseudoProbeInst>(I)) {
2800         // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
2801         // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2802         // the xform is not worth it.
2803         return Changed;
2804       }
2805   }
2806 
2807   if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock2->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
2808     IfBlock2 = nullptr;
2809   } else {
2810     DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock2);
2811     for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock2->begin(); !I->isTerminator(); ++I)
2812       if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) &&
2813           !isa<PseudoProbeInst>(I)) {
2814         // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
2815         // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2816         // the xform is not worth it.
2817         return Changed;
2818       }
2819   }
2820   assert(DomBlock && "Failed to find root DomBlock");
2821 
2822   // If either of the blocks has it's address taken, we can't do this fold.
2823   if ((IfBlock1 && IfBlock1->hasAddressTaken()) ||
2824       (IfBlock2 && IfBlock2->hasAddressTaken()))
2825     return Changed;
2826 
2827   LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOUND IF CONDITION!  " << *IfCond
2828                     << "  T: " << IfTrue->getName()
2829                     << "  F: " << IfFalse->getName() << "\n");
2830 
2831   // If we can still promote the PHI nodes after this gauntlet of tests,
2832   // do all of the PHI's now.
2833   Instruction *InsertPt = DomBlock->getTerminator();
2834   IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(InsertPt);
2835 
2836   // Move all 'aggressive' instructions, which are defined in the
2837   // conditional parts of the if's up to the dominating block.
2838   if (IfBlock1)
2839     hoistAllInstructionsInto(DomBlock, InsertPt, IfBlock1);
2840   if (IfBlock2)
2841     hoistAllInstructionsInto(DomBlock, InsertPt, IfBlock2);
2842 
2843   // Propagate fast-math-flags from phi nodes to replacement selects.
2844   IRBuilder<>::FastMathFlagGuard FMFGuard(Builder);
2845   while (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
2846     if (isa<FPMathOperator>(PN))
2847       Builder.setFastMathFlags(PN->getFastMathFlags());
2848 
2849     // Change the PHI node into a select instruction.
2850     Value *TrueVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfFalse);
2851     Value *FalseVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfTrue);
2852 
2853     Value *Sel = Builder.CreateSelect(IfCond, TrueVal, FalseVal, "", InsertPt);
2854     PN->replaceAllUsesWith(Sel);
2855     Sel->takeName(PN);
2856     PN->eraseFromParent();
2857   }
2858 
2859   // At this point, IfBlock1 and IfBlock2 are both empty, so our if statement
2860   // has been flattened.  Change DomBlock to jump directly to our new block to
2861   // avoid other simplifycfg's kicking in on the diamond.
2862   Instruction *OldTI = DomBlock->getTerminator();
2863   Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
2864   Builder.CreateBr(BB);
2865 
2866   SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 3> Updates;
2867   if (DTU) {
2868     Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, DomBlock, BB});
2869     for (auto *Successor : successors(DomBlock))
2870       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, DomBlock, Successor});
2871   }
2872 
2873   OldTI->eraseFromParent();
2874   if (DTU)
2875     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
2876 
2877   return true;
2878 }
2879 
2880 /// If we found a conditional branch that goes to two returning blocks,
2881 /// try to merge them together into one return,
2882 /// introducing a select if the return values disagree.
2883 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BranchInst *BI,
2884                                                     IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
2885   auto *BB = BI->getParent();
2886   assert(BI->isConditional() && "Must be a conditional branch");
2887   BasicBlock *TrueSucc = BI->getSuccessor(0);
2888   BasicBlock *FalseSucc = BI->getSuccessor(1);
2889   // NOTE: destinations may match, this could be degenerate uncond branch.
2890   ReturnInst *TrueRet = cast<ReturnInst>(TrueSucc->getTerminator());
2891   ReturnInst *FalseRet = cast<ReturnInst>(FalseSucc->getTerminator());
2892 
2893   // Check to ensure both blocks are empty (just a return) or optionally empty
2894   // with PHI nodes.  If there are other instructions, merging would cause extra
2895   // computation on one path or the other.
2896   if (!TrueSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
2897     return false;
2898   if (!FalseSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
2899     return false;
2900 
2901   Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
2902   // Okay, we found a branch that is going to two return nodes.  If
2903   // there is no return value for this function, just change the
2904   // branch into a return.
2905   if (FalseRet->getNumOperands() == 0) {
2906     TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BB);
2907     FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BB);
2908     Builder.CreateRetVoid();
2909     EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(BI);
2910     if (DTU) {
2911       SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 2> Updates;
2912       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, BB, TrueSucc});
2913       if (TrueSucc != FalseSucc)
2914         Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, BB, FalseSucc});
2915       DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
2916     }
2917     return true;
2918   }
2919 
2920   // Otherwise, figure out what the true and false return values are
2921   // so we can insert a new select instruction.
2922   Value *TrueValue = TrueRet->getReturnValue();
2923   Value *FalseValue = FalseRet->getReturnValue();
2924 
2925   // Unwrap any PHI nodes in the return blocks.
2926   if (PHINode *TVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(TrueValue))
2927     if (TVPN->getParent() == TrueSucc)
2928       TrueValue = TVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2929   if (PHINode *FVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(FalseValue))
2930     if (FVPN->getParent() == FalseSucc)
2931       FalseValue = FVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2932 
2933   // In order for this transformation to be safe, we must be able to
2934   // unconditionally execute both operands to the return.  This is
2935   // normally the case, but we could have a potentially-trapping
2936   // constant expression that prevents this transformation from being
2937   // safe.
2938   if (ConstantExpr *TCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(TrueValue))
2939     if (TCV->canTrap())
2940       return false;
2941   if (ConstantExpr *FCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(FalseValue))
2942     if (FCV->canTrap())
2943       return false;
2944 
2945   // Okay, we collected all the mapped values and checked them for sanity, and
2946   // defined to really do this transformation.  First, update the CFG.
2947   TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BB);
2948   FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BB);
2949 
2950   // Insert select instructions where needed.
2951   Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
2952   if (TrueValue) {
2953     // Insert a select if the results differ.
2954     if (TrueValue == FalseValue || isa<UndefValue>(FalseValue)) {
2955     } else if (isa<UndefValue>(TrueValue)) {
2956       TrueValue = FalseValue;
2957     } else {
2958       TrueValue =
2959           Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueValue, FalseValue, "retval", BI);
2960     }
2961   }
2962 
2963   Value *RI =
2964       !TrueValue ? Builder.CreateRetVoid() : Builder.CreateRet(TrueValue);
2965 
2966   (void)RI;
2967 
2968   LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "\nCHANGING BRANCH TO TWO RETURNS INTO SELECT:"
2969                     << "\n  " << *BI << "\nNewRet = " << *RI << "\nTRUEBLOCK: "
2970                     << *TrueSucc << "\nFALSEBLOCK: " << *FalseSucc);
2971 
2972   EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(BI);
2973   if (DTU) {
2974     SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 2> Updates;
2975     Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, BB, TrueSucc});
2976     if (TrueSucc != FalseSucc)
2977       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, BB, FalseSucc});
2978     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
2979   }
2980 
2981   return true;
2982 }
2983 
2984 static Value *createLogicalOp(IRBuilderBase &Builder,
2985                               Instruction::BinaryOps Opc, Value *LHS,
2986                               Value *RHS, const Twine &Name = "") {
2987   // Try to relax logical op to binary op.
2988   if (impliesPoison(RHS, LHS))
2989     return Builder.CreateBinOp(Opc, LHS, RHS, Name);
2990   if (Opc == Instruction::And)
2991     return Builder.CreateLogicalAnd(LHS, RHS, Name);
2992   if (Opc == Instruction::Or)
2993     return Builder.CreateLogicalOr(LHS, RHS, Name);
2994   llvm_unreachable("Invalid logical opcode");
2995 }
2996 
2997 /// Return true if either PBI or BI has branch weight available, and store
2998 /// the weights in {Pred|Succ}{True|False}Weight. If one of PBI and BI does
2999 /// not have branch weight, use 1:1 as its weight.
3000 static bool extractPredSuccWeights(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
3001                                    uint64_t &PredTrueWeight,
3002                                    uint64_t &PredFalseWeight,
3003                                    uint64_t &SuccTrueWeight,
3004                                    uint64_t &SuccFalseWeight) {
3005   bool PredHasWeights =
3006       PBI->extractProfMetadata(PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight);
3007   bool SuccHasWeights =
3008       BI->extractProfMetadata(SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
3009   if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
3010     if (!PredHasWeights)
3011       PredTrueWeight = PredFalseWeight = 1;
3012     if (!SuccHasWeights)
3013       SuccTrueWeight = SuccFalseWeight = 1;
3014     return true;
3015   } else {
3016     return false;
3017   }
3018 }
3019 
3020 /// Determine if the two branches share a common destination and deduce a glue
3021 /// that joins the branches' conditions to arrive at the common destination if
3022 /// that would be profitable.
3023 static Optional<std::pair<Instruction::BinaryOps, bool>>
3024 shouldFoldCondBranchesToCommonDestination(BranchInst *BI, BranchInst *PBI,
3025                                           const TargetTransformInfo *TTI) {
3026   assert(BI && PBI && BI->isConditional() && PBI->isConditional() &&
3027          "Both blocks must end with a conditional branches.");
3028   assert(is_contained(predecessors(BI->getParent()), PBI->getParent()) &&
3029          "PredBB must be a predecessor of BB.");
3030 
3031   // We have the potential to fold the conditions together, but if the
3032   // predecessor branch is predictable, we may not want to merge them.
3033   uint64_t PTWeight, PFWeight;
3034   BranchProbability PBITrueProb, Likely;
3035   if (TTI && PBI->extractProfMetadata(PTWeight, PFWeight) &&
3036       (PTWeight + PFWeight) != 0) {
3037     PBITrueProb =
3038         BranchProbability::getBranchProbability(PTWeight, PTWeight + PFWeight);
3039     Likely = TTI->getPredictableBranchThreshold();
3040   }
3041 
3042   if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
3043     // Speculate the 2nd condition unless the 1st is probably true.
3044     if (PBITrueProb.isUnknown() || PBITrueProb < Likely)
3045       return {{Instruction::Or, false}};
3046   } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3047     // Speculate the 2nd condition unless the 1st is probably false.
3048     if (PBITrueProb.isUnknown() || PBITrueProb.getCompl() < Likely)
3049       return {{Instruction::And, false}};
3050   } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3051     // Speculate the 2nd condition unless the 1st is probably true.
3052     if (PBITrueProb.isUnknown() || PBITrueProb < Likely)
3053       return {{Instruction::And, true}};
3054   } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
3055     // Speculate the 2nd condition unless the 1st is probably false.
3056     if (PBITrueProb.isUnknown() || PBITrueProb.getCompl() < Likely)
3057       return {{Instruction::Or, true}};
3058   }
3059   return None;
3060 }
3061 
3062 static bool performBranchToCommonDestFolding(BranchInst *BI, BranchInst *PBI,
3063                                              DomTreeUpdater *DTU,
3064                                              MemorySSAUpdater *MSSAU,
3065                                              const TargetTransformInfo *TTI) {
3066   BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
3067   BasicBlock *PredBlock = PBI->getParent();
3068 
3069   // Determine if the two branches share a common destination.
3070   Instruction::BinaryOps Opc;
3071   bool InvertPredCond;
3072   std::tie(Opc, InvertPredCond) =
3073       *shouldFoldCondBranchesToCommonDestination(BI, PBI, TTI);
3074 
3075   LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRANCH TO COMMON DEST:\n" << *PBI << *BB);
3076 
3077   IRBuilder<> Builder(PBI);
3078   // The builder is used to create instructions to eliminate the branch in BB.
3079   // If BB's terminator has !annotation metadata, add it to the new
3080   // instructions.
3081   Builder.CollectMetadataToCopy(BB->getTerminator(),
3082                                 {LLVMContext::MD_annotation});
3083 
3084   // If we need to invert the condition in the pred block to match, do so now.
3085   if (InvertPredCond) {
3086     Value *NewCond = PBI->getCondition();
3087     if (NewCond->hasOneUse() && isa<CmpInst>(NewCond)) {
3088       CmpInst *CI = cast<CmpInst>(NewCond);
3089       CI->setPredicate(CI->getInversePredicate());
3090     } else {
3091       NewCond =
3092           Builder.CreateNot(NewCond, PBI->getCondition()->getName() + ".not");
3093     }
3094 
3095     PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
3096     PBI->swapSuccessors();
3097   }
3098 
3099   BasicBlock *UniqueSucc =
3100       PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(0) : BI->getSuccessor(1);
3101 
3102   // Before cloning instructions, notify the successor basic block that it
3103   // is about to have a new predecessor. This will update PHI nodes,
3104   // which will allow us to update live-out uses of bonus instructions.
3105   AddPredecessorToBlock(UniqueSucc, PredBlock, BB, MSSAU);
3106 
3107   // Try to update branch weights.
3108   uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
3109   if (extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
3110                              SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight)) {
3111     SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> NewWeights;
3112 
3113     if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
3114       // PBI: br i1 %x, BB, FalseDest
3115       // BI:  br i1 %y, UniqueSucc, FalseDest
3116       // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
3117       NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
3118       // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
3119       //               TrueWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
3120       // We assume that total weights of a BranchInst can fit into 32 bits.
3121       // Therefore, we will not have overflow using 64-bit arithmetic.
3122       NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight *
3123                                (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
3124                            PredTrueWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
3125     } else {
3126       // PBI: br i1 %x, TrueDest, BB
3127       // BI:  br i1 %y, TrueDest, UniqueSucc
3128       // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
3129       //              FalseWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
3130       NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
3131                            PredFalseWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
3132       // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
3133       NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
3134     }
3135 
3136     // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
3137     FitWeights(NewWeights);
3138 
3139     SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(), NewWeights.end());
3140     setBranchWeights(PBI, MDWeights[0], MDWeights[1]);
3141 
3142     // TODO: If BB is reachable from all paths through PredBlock, then we
3143     // could replace PBI's branch probabilities with BI's.
3144   } else
3145     PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, nullptr);
3146 
3147   // Now, update the CFG.
3148   PBI->setSuccessor(PBI->getSuccessor(0) != BB, UniqueSucc);
3149 
3150   if (DTU)
3151     DTU->applyUpdates({{DominatorTree::Insert, PredBlock, UniqueSucc},
3152                        {DominatorTree::Delete, PredBlock, BB}});
3153 
3154   // If BI was a loop latch, it may have had associated loop metadata.
3155   // We need to copy it to the new latch, that is, PBI.
3156   if (MDNode *LoopMD = BI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_loop))
3157     PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_loop, LoopMD);
3158 
3159   ValueToValueMapTy VMap; // maps original values to cloned values
3160   CloneInstructionsIntoPredecessorBlockAndUpdateSSAUses(BB, PredBlock, VMap);
3161 
3162   // Now that the Cond was cloned into the predecessor basic block,
3163   // or/and the two conditions together.
3164   Value *BICond = VMap[BI->getCondition()];
3165   PBI->setCondition(
3166       createLogicalOp(Builder, Opc, PBI->getCondition(), BICond, "or.cond"));
3167 
3168   // Copy any debug value intrinsics into the end of PredBlock.
3169   for (Instruction &I : *BB) {
3170     if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
3171       Instruction *NewI = I.clone();
3172       RemapInstruction(NewI, VMap,
3173                        RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
3174       NewI->insertBefore(PBI);
3175     }
3176   }
3177 
3178   ++NumFoldBranchToCommonDest;
3179   return true;
3180 }
3181 
3182 /// If this basic block is simple enough, and if a predecessor branches to us
3183 /// and one of our successors, fold the block into the predecessor and use
3184 /// logical operations to pick the right destination.
3185 bool llvm::FoldBranchToCommonDest(BranchInst *BI, DomTreeUpdater *DTU,
3186                                   MemorySSAUpdater *MSSAU,
3187                                   const TargetTransformInfo *TTI,
3188                                   unsigned BonusInstThreshold) {
3189   // If this block ends with an unconditional branch,
3190   // let SpeculativelyExecuteBB() deal with it.
3191   if (!BI->isConditional())
3192     return false;
3193 
3194   BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
3195   TargetTransformInfo::TargetCostKind CostKind =
3196     BB->getParent()->hasMinSize() ? TargetTransformInfo::TCK_CodeSize
3197                                   : TargetTransformInfo::TCK_SizeAndLatency;
3198 
3199   Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
3200 
3201   if (!Cond || (!isa<CmpInst>(Cond) && !isa<BinaryOperator>(Cond)) ||
3202       Cond->getParent() != BB || !Cond->hasOneUse())
3203     return false;
3204 
3205   // Cond is known to be a compare or binary operator.  Check to make sure that
3206   // neither operand is a potentially-trapping constant expression.
3207   if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(0)))
3208     if (CE->canTrap())
3209       return false;
3210   if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(1)))
3211     if (CE->canTrap())
3212       return false;
3213 
3214   // Finally, don't infinitely unroll conditional loops.
3215   if (is_contained(successors(BB), BB))
3216     return false;
3217 
3218   // With which predecessors will we want to deal with?
3219   SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> Preds;
3220   for (BasicBlock *PredBlock : predecessors(BB)) {
3221     BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator());
3222 
3223     // Check that we have two conditional branches.  If there is a PHI node in
3224     // the common successor, verify that the same value flows in from both
3225     // blocks.
3226     if (!PBI || PBI->isUnconditional() || !SafeToMergeTerminators(BI, PBI))
3227       continue;
3228 
3229     // Determine if the two branches share a common destination.
3230     Instruction::BinaryOps Opc;
3231     bool InvertPredCond;
3232     if (auto Recipe = shouldFoldCondBranchesToCommonDestination(BI, PBI, TTI))
3233       std::tie(Opc, InvertPredCond) = *Recipe;
3234     else
3235       continue;
3236 
3237     // Check the cost of inserting the necessary logic before performing the
3238     // transformation.
3239     if (TTI) {
3240       Type *Ty = BI->getCondition()->getType();
3241       InstructionCost Cost = TTI->getArithmeticInstrCost(Opc, Ty, CostKind);
3242       if (InvertPredCond && (!PBI->getCondition()->hasOneUse() ||
3243           !isa<CmpInst>(PBI->getCondition())))
3244         Cost += TTI->getArithmeticInstrCost(Instruction::Xor, Ty, CostKind);
3245 
3246       if (Cost > BranchFoldThreshold)
3247         continue;
3248     }
3249 
3250     // Ok, we do want to deal with this predecessor. Record it.
3251     Preds.emplace_back(PredBlock);
3252   }
3253 
3254   // If there aren't any predecessors into which we can fold,
3255   // don't bother checking the cost.
3256   if (Preds.empty())
3257     return false;
3258 
3259   // Only allow this transformation if computing the condition doesn't involve
3260   // too many instructions and these involved instructions can be executed
3261   // unconditionally. We denote all involved instructions except the condition
3262   // as "bonus instructions", and only allow this transformation when the
3263   // number of the bonus instructions we'll need to create when cloning into
3264   // each predecessor does not exceed a certain threshold.
3265   unsigned NumBonusInsts = 0;
3266   const unsigned PredCount = Preds.size();
3267   for (Instruction &I : *BB) {
3268     // Don't check the branch condition comparison itself.
3269     if (&I == Cond)
3270       continue;
3271     // Ignore dbg intrinsics, and the terminator.
3272     if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) || isa<BranchInst>(I))
3273       continue;
3274     // I must be safe to execute unconditionally.
3275     if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(&I))
3276       return false;
3277 
3278     // Account for the cost of duplicating this instruction into each
3279     // predecessor.
3280     NumBonusInsts += PredCount;
3281     // Early exits once we reach the limit.
3282     if (NumBonusInsts > BonusInstThreshold)
3283       return false;
3284   }
3285 
3286   // Ok, we have the budget. Perform the transformation.
3287   for (BasicBlock *PredBlock : Preds) {
3288     auto *PBI = cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator());
3289     return performBranchToCommonDestFolding(BI, PBI, DTU, MSSAU, TTI);
3290   }
3291   return false;
3292 }
3293 
3294 // If there is only one store in BB1 and BB2, return it, otherwise return
3295 // nullptr.
3296 static StoreInst *findUniqueStoreInBlocks(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2) {
3297   StoreInst *S = nullptr;
3298   for (auto *BB : {BB1, BB2}) {
3299     if (!BB)
3300       continue;
3301     for (auto &I : *BB)
3302       if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I)) {
3303         if (S)
3304           // Multiple stores seen.
3305           return nullptr;
3306         else
3307           S = SI;
3308       }
3309   }
3310   return S;
3311 }
3312 
3313 static Value *ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
3314                                               Value *AlternativeV = nullptr) {
3315   // PHI is going to be a PHI node that allows the value V that is defined in
3316   // BB to be referenced in BB's only successor.
3317   //
3318   // If AlternativeV is nullptr, the only value we care about in PHI is V. It
3319   // doesn't matter to us what the other operand is (it'll never get used). We
3320   // could just create a new PHI with an undef incoming value, but that could
3321   // increase register pressure if EarlyCSE/InstCombine can't fold it with some
3322   // other PHI. So here we directly look for some PHI in BB's successor with V
3323   // as an incoming operand. If we find one, we use it, else we create a new
3324   // one.
3325   //
3326   // If AlternativeV is not nullptr, we care about both incoming values in PHI.
3327   // PHI must be exactly: phi <ty> [ %BB, %V ], [ %OtherBB, %AlternativeV]
3328   // where OtherBB is the single other predecessor of BB's only successor.
3329   PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
3330   BasicBlock *Succ = BB->getSingleSuccessor();
3331 
3332   for (auto I = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++I)
3333     if (cast<PHINode>(I)->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB) == V) {
3334       PHI = cast<PHINode>(I);
3335       if (!AlternativeV)
3336         break;
3337 
3338       assert(Succ->hasNPredecessors(2));
3339       auto PredI = pred_begin(Succ);
3340       BasicBlock *OtherPredBB = *PredI == BB ? *++PredI : *PredI;
3341       if (PHI->getIncomingValueForBlock(OtherPredBB) == AlternativeV)
3342         break;
3343       PHI = nullptr;
3344     }
3345   if (PHI)
3346     return PHI;
3347 
3348   // If V is not an instruction defined in BB, just return it.
3349   if (!AlternativeV &&
3350       (!isa<Instruction>(V) || cast<Instruction>(V)->getParent() != BB))
3351     return V;
3352 
3353   PHI = PHINode::Create(V->getType(), 2, "simplifycfg.merge", &Succ->front());
3354   PHI->addIncoming(V, BB);
3355   for (BasicBlock *PredBB : predecessors(Succ))
3356     if (PredBB != BB)
3357       PHI->addIncoming(
3358           AlternativeV ? AlternativeV : UndefValue::get(V->getType()), PredBB);
3359   return PHI;
3360 }
3361 
3362 static bool mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(
3363     BasicBlock *PTB, BasicBlock *PFB, BasicBlock *QTB, BasicBlock *QFB,
3364     BasicBlock *PostBB, Value *Address, bool InvertPCond, bool InvertQCond,
3365     DomTreeUpdater *DTU, const DataLayout &DL, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
3366   // For every pointer, there must be exactly two stores, one coming from
3367   // PTB or PFB, and the other from QTB or QFB. We don't support more than one
3368   // store (to any address) in PTB,PFB or QTB,QFB.
3369   // FIXME: We could relax this restriction with a bit more work and performance
3370   // testing.
3371   StoreInst *PStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(PTB, PFB);
3372   StoreInst *QStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(QTB, QFB);
3373   if (!PStore || !QStore)
3374     return false;
3375 
3376   // Now check the stores are compatible.
3377   if (!QStore->isUnordered() || !PStore->isUnordered())
3378     return false;
3379 
3380   // Check that sinking the store won't cause program behavior changes. Sinking
3381   // the store out of the Q blocks won't change any behavior as we're sinking
3382   // from a block to its unconditional successor. But we're moving a store from
3383   // the P blocks down through the middle block (QBI) and past both QFB and QTB.
3384   // So we need to check that there are no aliasing loads or stores in
3385   // QBI, QTB and QFB. We also need to check there are no conflicting memory
3386   // operations between PStore and the end of its parent block.
3387   //
3388   // The ideal way to do this is to query AliasAnalysis, but we don't
3389   // preserve AA currently so that is dangerous. Be super safe and just
3390   // check there are no other memory operations at all.
3391   for (auto &I : *QFB->getSinglePredecessor())
3392     if (I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
3393       return false;
3394   for (auto &I : *QFB)
3395     if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
3396       return false;
3397   if (QTB)
3398     for (auto &I : *QTB)
3399       if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
3400         return false;
3401   for (auto I = BasicBlock::iterator(PStore), E = PStore->getParent()->end();
3402        I != E; ++I)
3403     if (&*I != PStore && I->mayReadOrWriteMemory())
3404       return false;
3405 
3406   // If we're not in aggressive mode, we only optimize if we have some
3407   // confidence that by optimizing we'll allow P and/or Q to be if-converted.
3408   auto IsWorthwhile = [&](BasicBlock *BB, ArrayRef<StoreInst *> FreeStores) {
3409     if (!BB)
3410       return true;
3411     // Heuristic: if the block can be if-converted/phi-folded and the
3412     // instructions inside are all cheap (arithmetic/GEPs), it's worthwhile to
3413     // thread this store.
3414     InstructionCost Cost = 0;
3415     InstructionCost Budget =
3416         PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
3417     for (auto &I : BB->instructionsWithoutDebug()) {
3418       // Consider terminator instruction to be free.
3419       if (I.isTerminator())
3420         continue;
3421       // If this is one the stores that we want to speculate out of this BB,
3422       // then don't count it's cost, consider it to be free.
3423       if (auto *S = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
3424         if (llvm::find(FreeStores, S))
3425           continue;
3426       // Else, we have a white-list of instructions that we are ak speculating.
3427       if (!isa<BinaryOperator>(I) && !isa<GetElementPtrInst>(I))
3428         return false; // Not in white-list - not worthwhile folding.
3429       // And finally, if this is a non-free instruction that we are okay
3430       // speculating, ensure that we consider the speculation budget.
3431       Cost += TTI.getUserCost(&I, TargetTransformInfo::TCK_SizeAndLatency);
3432       if (Cost > Budget)
3433         return false; // Eagerly refuse to fold as soon as we're out of budget.
3434     }
3435     assert(Cost <= Budget &&
3436            "When we run out of budget we will eagerly return from within the "
3437            "per-instruction loop.");
3438     return true;
3439   };
3440 
3441   const std::array<StoreInst *, 2> FreeStores = {PStore, QStore};
3442   if (!MergeCondStoresAggressively &&
3443       (!IsWorthwhile(PTB, FreeStores) || !IsWorthwhile(PFB, FreeStores) ||
3444        !IsWorthwhile(QTB, FreeStores) || !IsWorthwhile(QFB, FreeStores)))
3445     return false;
3446 
3447   // If PostBB has more than two predecessors, we need to split it so we can
3448   // sink the store.
3449   if (std::next(pred_begin(PostBB), 2) != pred_end(PostBB)) {
3450     // We know that QFB's only successor is PostBB. And QFB has a single
3451     // predecessor. If QTB exists, then its only successor is also PostBB.
3452     // If QTB does not exist, then QFB's only predecessor has a conditional
3453     // branch to QFB and PostBB.
3454     BasicBlock *TruePred = QTB ? QTB : QFB->getSinglePredecessor();
3455     BasicBlock *NewBB =
3456         SplitBlockPredecessors(PostBB, {QFB, TruePred}, "condstore.split", DTU);
3457     if (!NewBB)
3458       return false;
3459     PostBB = NewBB;
3460   }
3461 
3462   // OK, we're going to sink the stores to PostBB. The store has to be
3463   // conditional though, so first create the predicate.
3464   Value *PCond = cast<BranchInst>(PFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
3465                      ->getCondition();
3466   Value *QCond = cast<BranchInst>(QFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
3467                      ->getCondition();
3468 
3469   Value *PPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(PStore->getValueOperand(),
3470                                                 PStore->getParent());
3471   Value *QPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(QStore->getValueOperand(),
3472                                                 QStore->getParent(), PPHI);
3473 
3474   IRBuilder<> QB(&*PostBB->getFirstInsertionPt());
3475 
3476   Value *PPred = PStore->getParent() == PTB ? PCond : QB.CreateNot(PCond);
3477   Value *QPred = QStore->getParent() == QTB ? QCond : QB.CreateNot(QCond);
3478 
3479   if (InvertPCond)
3480     PPred = QB.CreateNot(PPred);
3481   if (InvertQCond)
3482     QPred = QB.CreateNot(QPred);
3483   Value *CombinedPred = QB.CreateOr(PPred, QPred);
3484 
3485   auto *T = SplitBlockAndInsertIfThen(CombinedPred, &*QB.GetInsertPoint(),
3486                                       /*Unreachable=*/false,
3487                                       /*BranchWeights=*/nullptr, DTU);
3488   QB.SetInsertPoint(T);
3489   StoreInst *SI = cast<StoreInst>(QB.CreateStore(QPHI, Address));
3490   AAMDNodes AAMD;
3491   PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/false);
3492   PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/true);
3493   SI->setAAMetadata(AAMD);
3494   // Choose the minimum alignment. If we could prove both stores execute, we
3495   // could use biggest one.  In this case, though, we only know that one of the
3496   // stores executes.  And we don't know it's safe to take the alignment from a
3497   // store that doesn't execute.
3498   SI->setAlignment(std::min(PStore->getAlign(), QStore->getAlign()));
3499 
3500   QStore->eraseFromParent();
3501   PStore->eraseFromParent();
3502 
3503   return true;
3504 }
3505 
3506 static bool mergeConditionalStores(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *QBI,
3507                                    DomTreeUpdater *DTU, const DataLayout &DL,
3508                                    const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
3509   // The intention here is to find diamonds or triangles (see below) where each
3510   // conditional block contains a store to the same address. Both of these
3511   // stores are conditional, so they can't be unconditionally sunk. But it may
3512   // be profitable to speculatively sink the stores into one merged store at the
3513   // end, and predicate the merged store on the union of the two conditions of
3514   // PBI and QBI.
3515   //
3516   // This can reduce the number of stores executed if both of the conditions are
3517   // true, and can allow the blocks to become small enough to be if-converted.
3518   // This optimization will also chain, so that ladders of test-and-set
3519   // sequences can be if-converted away.
3520   //
3521   // We only deal with simple diamonds or triangles:
3522   //
3523   //     PBI       or      PBI        or a combination of the two
3524   //    /   \               | \
3525   //   PTB  PFB             |  PFB
3526   //    \   /               | /
3527   //     QBI                QBI
3528   //    /  \                | \
3529   //   QTB  QFB             |  QFB
3530   //    \  /                | /
3531   //    PostBB            PostBB
3532   //
3533   // We model triangles as a type of diamond with a nullptr "true" block.
3534   // Triangles are canonicalized so that the fallthrough edge is represented by
3535   // a true condition, as in the diagram above.
3536   BasicBlock *PTB = PBI->getSuccessor(0);
3537   BasicBlock *PFB = PBI->getSuccessor(1);
3538   BasicBlock *QTB = QBI->getSuccessor(0);
3539   BasicBlock *QFB = QBI->getSuccessor(1);
3540   BasicBlock *PostBB = QFB->getSingleSuccessor();
3541 
3542   // Make sure we have a good guess for PostBB. If QTB's only successor is
3543   // QFB, then QFB is a better PostBB.
3544   if (QTB->getSingleSuccessor() == QFB)
3545     PostBB = QFB;
3546 
3547   // If we couldn't find a good PostBB, stop.
3548   if (!PostBB)
3549     return false;
3550 
3551   bool InvertPCond = false, InvertQCond = false;
3552   // Canonicalize fallthroughs to the true branches.
3553   if (PFB == QBI->getParent()) {
3554     std::swap(PFB, PTB);
3555     InvertPCond = true;
3556   }
3557   if (QFB == PostBB) {
3558     std::swap(QFB, QTB);
3559     InvertQCond = true;
3560   }
3561 
3562   // From this point on we can assume PTB or QTB may be fallthroughs but PFB
3563   // and QFB may not. Model fallthroughs as a nullptr block.
3564   if (PTB == QBI->getParent())
3565     PTB = nullptr;
3566   if (QTB == PostBB)
3567     QTB = nullptr;
3568 
3569   // Legality bailouts. We must have at least the non-fallthrough blocks and
3570   // the post-dominating block, and the non-fallthroughs must only have one
3571   // predecessor.
3572   auto HasOnePredAndOneSucc = [](BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *P, BasicBlock *S) {
3573     return BB->getSinglePredecessor() == P && BB->getSingleSuccessor() == S;
3574   };
3575   if (!HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PFB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent()) ||
3576       !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QFB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB))
3577     return false;
3578   if ((PTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PTB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent())) ||
3579       (QTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QTB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB)))
3580     return false;
3581   if (!QBI->getParent()->hasNUses(2))
3582     return false;
3583 
3584   // OK, this is a sequence of two diamonds or triangles.
3585   // Check if there are stores in PTB or PFB that are repeated in QTB or QFB.
3586   SmallPtrSet<Value *, 4> PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses;
3587   for (auto *BB : {PTB, PFB}) {
3588     if (!BB)
3589       continue;
3590     for (auto &I : *BB)
3591       if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
3592         PStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
3593   }
3594   for (auto *BB : {QTB, QFB}) {
3595     if (!BB)
3596       continue;
3597     for (auto &I : *BB)
3598       if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
3599         QStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
3600   }
3601 
3602   set_intersect(PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses);
3603   // set_intersect mutates PStoreAddresses in place. Rename it here to make it
3604   // clear what it contains.
3605   auto &CommonAddresses = PStoreAddresses;
3606 
3607   bool Changed = false;
3608   for (auto *Address : CommonAddresses)
3609     Changed |=
3610         mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(PTB, PFB, QTB, QFB, PostBB, Address,
3611                                        InvertPCond, InvertQCond, DTU, DL, TTI);
3612   return Changed;
3613 }
3614 
3615 /// If the previous block ended with a widenable branch, determine if reusing
3616 /// the target block is profitable and legal.  This will have the effect of
3617 /// "widening" PBI, but doesn't require us to reason about hosting safety.
3618 static bool tryWidenCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
3619                                            DomTreeUpdater *DTU) {
3620   // TODO: This can be generalized in two important ways:
3621   // 1) We can allow phi nodes in IfFalseBB and simply reuse all the input
3622   //    values from the PBI edge.
3623   // 2) We can sink side effecting instructions into BI's fallthrough
3624   //    successor provided they doesn't contribute to computation of
3625   //    BI's condition.
3626   Value *CondWB, *WC;
3627   BasicBlock *IfTrueBB, *IfFalseBB;
3628   if (!parseWidenableBranch(PBI, CondWB, WC, IfTrueBB, IfFalseBB) ||
3629       IfTrueBB != BI->getParent() || !BI->getParent()->getSinglePredecessor())
3630     return false;
3631   if (!IfFalseBB->phis().empty())
3632     return false; // TODO
3633   // Use lambda to lazily compute expensive condition after cheap ones.
3634   auto NoSideEffects = [](BasicBlock &BB) {
3635     return !llvm::any_of(BB, [](const Instruction &I) {
3636         return I.mayWriteToMemory() || I.mayHaveSideEffects();
3637       });
3638   };
3639   if (BI->getSuccessor(1) != IfFalseBB && // no inf looping
3640       BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminatingDeoptimizeCall() && // profitability
3641       NoSideEffects(*BI->getParent())) {
3642     auto *OldSuccessor = BI->getSuccessor(1);
3643     OldSuccessor->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
3644     BI->setSuccessor(1, IfFalseBB);
3645     if (DTU)
3646       DTU->applyUpdates(
3647           {{DominatorTree::Insert, BI->getParent(), IfFalseBB},
3648            {DominatorTree::Delete, BI->getParent(), OldSuccessor}});
3649     return true;
3650   }
3651   if (BI->getSuccessor(0) != IfFalseBB && // no inf looping
3652       BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminatingDeoptimizeCall() && // profitability
3653       NoSideEffects(*BI->getParent())) {
3654     auto *OldSuccessor = BI->getSuccessor(0);
3655     OldSuccessor->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
3656     BI->setSuccessor(0, IfFalseBB);
3657     if (DTU)
3658       DTU->applyUpdates(
3659           {{DominatorTree::Insert, BI->getParent(), IfFalseBB},
3660            {DominatorTree::Delete, BI->getParent(), OldSuccessor}});
3661     return true;
3662   }
3663   return false;
3664 }
3665 
3666 /// If we have a conditional branch as a predecessor of another block,
3667 /// this function tries to simplify it.  We know
3668 /// that PBI and BI are both conditional branches, and BI is in one of the
3669 /// successor blocks of PBI - PBI branches to BI.
3670 static bool SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
3671                                            DomTreeUpdater *DTU,
3672                                            const DataLayout &DL,
3673                                            const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
3674   assert(PBI->isConditional() && BI->isConditional());
3675   BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
3676 
3677   // If this block ends with a branch instruction, and if there is a
3678   // predecessor that ends on a branch of the same condition, make
3679   // this conditional branch redundant.
3680   if (PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
3681       PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3682     // Okay, the outcome of this conditional branch is statically
3683     // knowable.  If this block had a single pred, handle specially.
3684     if (BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
3685       // Turn this into a branch on constant.
3686       bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
3687       BI->setCondition(
3688           ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue));
3689       return true; // Nuke the branch on constant.
3690     }
3691 
3692     // Otherwise, if there are multiple predecessors, insert a PHI that merges
3693     // in the constant and simplify the block result.  Subsequent passes of
3694     // simplifycfg will thread the block.
3695     if (BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) {
3696       pred_iterator PB = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB);
3697       PHINode *NewPN = PHINode::Create(
3698           Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), std::distance(PB, PE),
3699           BI->getCondition()->getName() + ".pr", &BB->front());
3700       // Okay, we're going to insert the PHI node.  Since PBI is not the only
3701       // predecessor, compute the PHI'd conditional value for all of the preds.
3702       // Any predecessor where the condition is not computable we keep symbolic.
3703       for (pred_iterator PI = PB; PI != PE; ++PI) {
3704         BasicBlock *P = *PI;
3705         if ((PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(P->getTerminator())) && PBI != BI &&
3706             PBI->isConditional() && PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
3707             PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3708           bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
3709           NewPN->addIncoming(
3710               ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue),
3711               P);
3712         } else {
3713           NewPN->addIncoming(BI->getCondition(), P);
3714         }
3715       }
3716 
3717       BI->setCondition(NewPN);
3718       return true;
3719     }
3720   }
3721 
3722   // If the previous block ended with a widenable branch, determine if reusing
3723   // the target block is profitable and legal.  This will have the effect of
3724   // "widening" PBI, but doesn't require us to reason about hosting safety.
3725   if (tryWidenCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI, DTU))
3726     return true;
3727 
3728   if (auto *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BI->getCondition()))
3729     if (CE->canTrap())
3730       return false;
3731 
3732   // If both branches are conditional and both contain stores to the same
3733   // address, remove the stores from the conditionals and create a conditional
3734   // merged store at the end.
3735   if (MergeCondStores && mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI, DTU, DL, TTI))
3736     return true;
3737 
3738   // If this is a conditional branch in an empty block, and if any
3739   // predecessors are a conditional branch to one of our destinations,
3740   // fold the conditions into logical ops and one cond br.
3741 
3742   // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
3743   if (&*BB->instructionsWithoutDebug().begin() != BI)
3744     return false;
3745 
3746   int PBIOp, BIOp;
3747   if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
3748     PBIOp = 0;
3749     BIOp = 0;
3750   } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3751     PBIOp = 0;
3752     BIOp = 1;
3753   } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
3754     PBIOp = 1;
3755     BIOp = 0;
3756   } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3757     PBIOp = 1;
3758     BIOp = 1;
3759   } else {
3760     return false;
3761   }
3762 
3763   // Check to make sure that the other destination of this branch
3764   // isn't BB itself.  If so, this is an infinite loop that will
3765   // keep getting unwound.
3766   if (PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp) == BB)
3767     return false;
3768 
3769   // Do not perform this transformation if it would require
3770   // insertion of a large number of select instructions. For targets
3771   // without predication/cmovs, this is a big pessimization.
3772 
3773   // Also do not perform this transformation if any phi node in the common
3774   // destination block can trap when reached by BB or PBB (PR17073). In that
3775   // case, it would be unsafe to hoist the operation into a select instruction.
3776 
3777   BasicBlock *CommonDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp);
3778   BasicBlock *RemovedDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp ^ 1);
3779   unsigned NumPhis = 0;
3780   for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);
3781        ++II, ++NumPhis) {
3782     if (NumPhis > 2) // Disable this xform.
3783       return false;
3784 
3785     PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II);
3786     Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3787     if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BIV))
3788       if (CE->canTrap())
3789         return false;
3790 
3791     unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
3792     Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
3793     if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(PBIV))
3794       if (CE->canTrap())
3795         return false;
3796   }
3797 
3798   // Finally, if everything is ok, fold the branches to logical ops.
3799   BasicBlock *OtherDest = BI->getSuccessor(BIOp ^ 1);
3800 
3801   LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRs:" << *PBI->getParent()
3802                     << "AND: " << *BI->getParent());
3803 
3804   SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 5> Updates;
3805 
3806   // If OtherDest *is* BB, then BB is a basic block with a single conditional
3807   // branch in it, where one edge (OtherDest) goes back to itself but the other
3808   // exits.  We don't *know* that the program avoids the infinite loop
3809   // (even though that seems likely).  If we do this xform naively, we'll end up
3810   // recursively unpeeling the loop.  Since we know that (after the xform is
3811   // done) that the block *is* infinite if reached, we just make it an obviously
3812   // infinite loop with no cond branch.
3813   if (OtherDest == BB) {
3814     // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
3815     // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
3816     BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock =
3817         BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop", BB->getParent());
3818     BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
3819     if (DTU)
3820       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock});
3821     OtherDest = InfLoopBlock;
3822   }
3823 
3824   LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
3825 
3826   // BI may have other predecessors.  Because of this, we leave
3827   // it alone, but modify PBI.
3828 
3829   // Make sure we get to CommonDest on True&True directions.
3830   Value *PBICond = PBI->getCondition();
3831   IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(PBI);
3832   if (PBIOp)
3833     PBICond = Builder.CreateNot(PBICond, PBICond->getName() + ".not");
3834 
3835   Value *BICond = BI->getCondition();
3836   if (BIOp)
3837     BICond = Builder.CreateNot(BICond, BICond->getName() + ".not");
3838 
3839   // Merge the conditions.
3840   Value *Cond =
3841       createLogicalOp(Builder, Instruction::Or, PBICond, BICond, "brmerge");
3842 
3843   // Modify PBI to branch on the new condition to the new dests.
3844   PBI->setCondition(Cond);
3845   PBI->setSuccessor(0, CommonDest);
3846   PBI->setSuccessor(1, OtherDest);
3847 
3848   if (DTU) {
3849     Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, PBI->getParent(), OtherDest});
3850     Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, PBI->getParent(), RemovedDest});
3851 
3852     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
3853   }
3854 
3855   // Update branch weight for PBI.
3856   uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
3857   uint64_t PredCommon, PredOther, SuccCommon, SuccOther;
3858   bool HasWeights =
3859       extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
3860                              SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
3861   if (HasWeights) {
3862     PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3863     PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3864     SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3865     SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
3866     // The weight to CommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal +
3867     //                                    PredOther * SuccCommon.
3868     // The weight to OtherDest should be PredOther * SuccOther.
3869     uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther) +
3870                                   PredOther * SuccCommon,
3871                               PredOther * SuccOther};
3872     // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
3873     FitWeights(NewWeights);
3874 
3875     setBranchWeights(PBI, NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]);
3876   }
3877 
3878   // OtherDest may have phi nodes.  If so, add an entry from PBI's
3879   // block that are identical to the entries for BI's block.
3880   AddPredecessorToBlock(OtherDest, PBI->getParent(), BB);
3881 
3882   // We know that the CommonDest already had an edge from PBI to
3883   // it.  If it has PHIs though, the PHIs may have different
3884   // entries for BB and PBI's BB.  If so, insert a select to make
3885   // them agree.
3886   for (PHINode &PN : CommonDest->phis()) {
3887     Value *BIV = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3888     unsigned PBBIdx = PN.getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
3889     Value *PBIV = PN.getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
3890     if (BIV != PBIV) {
3891       // Insert a select in PBI to pick the right value.
3892       SelectInst *NV = cast<SelectInst>(
3893           Builder.CreateSelect(PBICond, PBIV, BIV, PBIV->getName() + ".mux"));
3894       PN.setIncomingValue(PBBIdx, NV);
3895       // Although the select has the same condition as PBI, the original branch
3896       // weights for PBI do not apply to the new select because the select's
3897       // 'logical' edges are incoming edges of the phi that is eliminated, not
3898       // the outgoing edges of PBI.
3899       if (HasWeights) {
3900         uint64_t PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3901         uint64_t PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3902         uint64_t SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3903         uint64_t SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
3904         // The weight to PredCommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal.
3905         // The weight to PredOtherDest should be PredOther * SuccCommon.
3906         uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther),
3907                                   PredOther * SuccCommon};
3908 
3909         FitWeights(NewWeights);
3910 
3911         setBranchWeights(NV, NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]);
3912       }
3913     }
3914   }
3915 
3916   LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "INTO: " << *PBI->getParent());
3917   LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
3918 
3919   // This basic block is probably dead.  We know it has at least
3920   // one fewer predecessor.
3921   return true;
3922 }
3923 
3924 // Simplifies a terminator by replacing it with a branch to TrueBB if Cond is
3925 // true or to FalseBB if Cond is false.
3926 // Takes care of updating the successors and removing the old terminator.
3927 // Also makes sure not to introduce new successors by assuming that edges to
3928 // non-successor TrueBBs and FalseBBs aren't reachable.
3929 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(Instruction *OldTerm,
3930                                                 Value *Cond, BasicBlock *TrueBB,
3931                                                 BasicBlock *FalseBB,
3932                                                 uint32_t TrueWeight,
3933                                                 uint32_t FalseWeight) {
3934   auto *BB = OldTerm->getParent();
3935   // Remove any superfluous successor edges from the CFG.
3936   // First, figure out which successors to preserve.
3937   // If TrueBB and FalseBB are equal, only try to preserve one copy of that
3938   // successor.
3939   BasicBlock *KeepEdge1 = TrueBB;
3940   BasicBlock *KeepEdge2 = TrueBB != FalseBB ? FalseBB : nullptr;
3941 
3942   SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 2> RemovedSuccessors;
3943 
3944   // Then remove the rest.
3945   for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(OldTerm)) {
3946     // Make sure only to keep exactly one copy of each edge.
3947     if (Succ == KeepEdge1)
3948       KeepEdge1 = nullptr;
3949     else if (Succ == KeepEdge2)
3950       KeepEdge2 = nullptr;
3951     else {
3952       Succ->removePredecessor(BB,
3953                               /*KeepOneInputPHIs=*/true);
3954 
3955       if (Succ != TrueBB && Succ != FalseBB)
3956         RemovedSuccessors.insert(Succ);
3957     }
3958   }
3959 
3960   IRBuilder<> Builder(OldTerm);
3961   Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(OldTerm->getDebugLoc());
3962 
3963   // Insert an appropriate new terminator.
3964   if (!KeepEdge1 && !KeepEdge2) {
3965     if (TrueBB == FalseBB) {
3966       // We were only looking for one successor, and it was present.
3967       // Create an unconditional branch to it.
3968       Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
3969     } else {
3970       // We found both of the successors we were looking for.
3971       // Create a conditional branch sharing the condition of the select.
3972       BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cond, TrueBB, FalseBB);
3973       if (TrueWeight != FalseWeight)
3974         setBranchWeights(NewBI, TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
3975     }
3976   } else if (KeepEdge1 && (KeepEdge2 || TrueBB == FalseBB)) {
3977     // Neither of the selected blocks were successors, so this
3978     // terminator must be unreachable.
3979     new UnreachableInst(OldTerm->getContext(), OldTerm);
3980   } else {
3981     // One of the selected values was a successor, but the other wasn't.
3982     // Insert an unconditional branch to the one that was found;
3983     // the edge to the one that wasn't must be unreachable.
3984     if (!KeepEdge1) {
3985       // Only TrueBB was found.
3986       Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
3987     } else {
3988       // Only FalseBB was found.
3989       Builder.CreateBr(FalseBB);
3990     }
3991   }
3992 
3993   EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(OldTerm);
3994 
3995   if (DTU) {
3996     SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 2> Updates;
3997     Updates.reserve(RemovedSuccessors.size());
3998     for (auto *RemovedSuccessor : RemovedSuccessors)
3999       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, BB, RemovedSuccessor});
4000     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
4001   }
4002 
4003   return true;
4004 }
4005 
4006 // Replaces
4007 //   (switch (select cond, X, Y)) on constant X, Y
4008 // with a branch - conditional if X and Y lead to distinct BBs,
4009 // unconditional otherwise.
4010 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI,
4011                                             SelectInst *Select) {
4012   // Check for constant integer values in the select.
4013   ConstantInt *TrueVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getTrueValue());
4014   ConstantInt *FalseVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getFalseValue());
4015   if (!TrueVal || !FalseVal)
4016     return false;
4017 
4018   // Find the relevant condition and destinations.
4019   Value *Condition = Select->getCondition();
4020   BasicBlock *TrueBB = SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal)->getCaseSuccessor();
4021   BasicBlock *FalseBB = SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal)->getCaseSuccessor();
4022 
4023   // Get weight for TrueBB and FalseBB.
4024   uint32_t TrueWeight = 0, FalseWeight = 0;
4025   SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
4026   bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
4027   if (HasWeights) {
4028     GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4029     if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
4030       TrueWeight =
4031           (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal)->getSuccessorIndex()];
4032       FalseWeight =
4033           (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal)->getSuccessorIndex()];
4034     }
4035   }
4036 
4037   // Perform the actual simplification.
4038   return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(SI, Condition, TrueBB, FalseBB, TrueWeight,
4039                                     FalseWeight);
4040 }
4041 
4042 // Replaces
4043 //   (indirectbr (select cond, blockaddress(@fn, BlockA),
4044 //                             blockaddress(@fn, BlockB)))
4045 // with
4046 //   (br cond, BlockA, BlockB).
4047 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI,
4048                                                 SelectInst *SI) {
4049   // Check that both operands of the select are block addresses.
4050   BlockAddress *TBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getTrueValue());
4051   BlockAddress *FBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getFalseValue());
4052   if (!TBA || !FBA)
4053     return false;
4054 
4055   // Extract the actual blocks.
4056   BasicBlock *TrueBB = TBA->getBasicBlock();
4057   BasicBlock *FalseBB = FBA->getBasicBlock();
4058 
4059   // Perform the actual simplification.
4060   return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(IBI, SI->getCondition(), TrueBB, FalseBB, 0,
4061                                     0);
4062 }
4063 
4064 /// This is called when we find an icmp instruction
4065 /// (a seteq/setne with a constant) as the only instruction in a
4066 /// block that ends with an uncond branch.  We are looking for a very specific
4067 /// pattern that occurs when "A == 1 || A == 2 || A == 3" gets simplified.  In
4068 /// this case, we merge the first two "or's of icmp" into a switch, but then the
4069 /// default value goes to an uncond block with a seteq in it, we get something
4070 /// like:
4071 ///
4072 ///   switch i8 %A, label %DEFAULT [ i8 1, label %end    i8 2, label %end ]
4073 /// DEFAULT:
4074 ///   %tmp = icmp eq i8 %A, 92
4075 ///   br label %end
4076 /// end:
4077 ///   ... = phi i1 [ true, %entry ], [ %tmp, %DEFAULT ], [ true, %entry ]
4078 ///
4079 /// We prefer to split the edge to 'end' so that there is a true/false entry to
4080 /// the PHI, merging the third icmp into the switch.
4081 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::tryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(
4082     ICmpInst *ICI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
4083   BasicBlock *BB = ICI->getParent();
4084 
4085   // If the block has any PHIs in it or the icmp has multiple uses, it is too
4086   // complex.
4087   if (isa<PHINode>(BB->begin()) || !ICI->hasOneUse())
4088     return false;
4089 
4090   Value *V = ICI->getOperand(0);
4091   ConstantInt *Cst = cast<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1));
4092 
4093   // The pattern we're looking for is where our only predecessor is a switch on
4094   // 'V' and this block is the default case for the switch.  In this case we can
4095   // fold the compared value into the switch to simplify things.
4096   BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getSinglePredecessor();
4097   if (!Pred || !isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator()))
4098     return false;
4099 
4100   SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
4101   if (SI->getCondition() != V)
4102     return false;
4103 
4104   // If BB is reachable on a non-default case, then we simply know the value of
4105   // V in this block.  Substitute it and constant fold the icmp instruction
4106   // away.
4107   if (SI->getDefaultDest() != BB) {
4108     ConstantInt *VVal = SI->findCaseDest(BB);
4109     assert(VVal && "Should have a unique destination value");
4110     ICI->setOperand(0, VVal);
4111 
4112     if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(ICI, {DL, ICI})) {
4113       ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
4114       ICI->eraseFromParent();
4115     }
4116     // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
4117     return requestResimplify();
4118   }
4119 
4120   // Ok, the block is reachable from the default dest.  If the constant we're
4121   // comparing exists in one of the other edges, then we can constant fold ICI
4122   // and zap it.
4123   if (SI->findCaseValue(Cst) != SI->case_default()) {
4124     Value *V;
4125     if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
4126       V = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
4127     else
4128       V = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
4129 
4130     ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
4131     ICI->eraseFromParent();
4132     // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
4133     return requestResimplify();
4134   }
4135 
4136   // The use of the icmp has to be in the 'end' block, by the only PHI node in
4137   // the block.
4138   BasicBlock *SuccBlock = BB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
4139   PHINode *PHIUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(ICI->user_back());
4140   if (PHIUse == nullptr || PHIUse != &SuccBlock->front() ||
4141       isa<PHINode>(++BasicBlock::iterator(PHIUse)))
4142     return false;
4143 
4144   // If the icmp is a SETEQ, then the default dest gets false, the new edge gets
4145   // true in the PHI.
4146   Constant *DefaultCst = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
4147   Constant *NewCst = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
4148 
4149   if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
4150     std::swap(DefaultCst, NewCst);
4151 
4152   // Replace ICI (which is used by the PHI for the default value) with true or
4153   // false depending on if it is EQ or NE.
4154   ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(DefaultCst);
4155   ICI->eraseFromParent();
4156 
4157   SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 2> Updates;
4158 
4159   // Okay, the switch goes to this block on a default value.  Add an edge from
4160   // the switch to the merge point on the compared value.
4161   BasicBlock *NewBB =
4162       BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "switch.edge", BB->getParent(), BB);
4163   {
4164     SwitchInstProfUpdateWrapper SIW(*SI);
4165     auto W0 = SIW.getSuccessorWeight(0);
4166     SwitchInstProfUpdateWrapper::CaseWeightOpt NewW;
4167     if (W0) {
4168       NewW = ((uint64_t(*W0) + 1) >> 1);
4169       SIW.setSuccessorWeight(0, *NewW);
4170     }
4171     SIW.addCase(Cst, NewBB, NewW);
4172     if (DTU)
4173       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, Pred, NewBB});
4174   }
4175 
4176   // NewBB branches to the phi block, add the uncond branch and the phi entry.
4177   Builder.SetInsertPoint(NewBB);
4178   Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(SI->getDebugLoc());
4179   Builder.CreateBr(SuccBlock);
4180   PHIUse->addIncoming(NewCst, NewBB);
4181   if (DTU) {
4182     Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, NewBB, SuccBlock});
4183     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
4184   }
4185   return true;
4186 }
4187 
4188 /// The specified branch is a conditional branch.
4189 /// Check to see if it is branching on an or/and chain of icmp instructions, and
4190 /// fold it into a switch instruction if so.
4191 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI,
4192                                                IRBuilder<> &Builder,
4193                                                const DataLayout &DL) {
4194   Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
4195   if (!Cond)
4196     return false;
4197 
4198   // Change br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F into a switch instruction.
4199   // If this is a bunch of seteq's or'd together, or if it's a bunch of
4200   // 'setne's and'ed together, collect them.
4201 
4202   // Try to gather values from a chain of and/or to be turned into a switch
4203   ConstantComparesGatherer ConstantCompare(Cond, DL);
4204   // Unpack the result
4205   SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Values = ConstantCompare.Vals;
4206   Value *CompVal = ConstantCompare.CompValue;
4207   unsigned UsedICmps = ConstantCompare.UsedICmps;
4208   Value *ExtraCase = ConstantCompare.Extra;
4209 
4210   // If we didn't have a multiply compared value, fail.
4211   if (!CompVal)
4212     return false;
4213 
4214   // Avoid turning single icmps into a switch.
4215   if (UsedICmps <= 1)
4216     return false;
4217 
4218   bool TrueWhenEqual = match(Cond, m_LogicalOr(m_Value(), m_Value()));
4219 
4220   // There might be duplicate constants in the list, which the switch
4221   // instruction can't handle, remove them now.
4222   array_pod_sort(Values.begin(), Values.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
4223   Values.erase(std::unique(Values.begin(), Values.end()), Values.end());
4224 
4225   // If Extra was used, we require at least two switch values to do the
4226   // transformation.  A switch with one value is just a conditional branch.
4227   if (ExtraCase && Values.size() < 2)
4228     return false;
4229 
4230   // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
4231   // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
4232 
4233   // Figure out which block is which destination.
4234   BasicBlock *DefaultBB = BI->getSuccessor(1);
4235   BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
4236   if (!TrueWhenEqual)
4237     std::swap(DefaultBB, EdgeBB);
4238 
4239   BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
4240 
4241   LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Converting 'icmp' chain with " << Values.size()
4242                     << " cases into SWITCH.  BB is:\n"
4243                     << *BB);
4244 
4245   SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 2> Updates;
4246 
4247   // If there are any extra values that couldn't be folded into the switch
4248   // then we evaluate them with an explicit branch first. Split the block
4249   // right before the condbr to handle it.
4250   if (ExtraCase) {
4251     BasicBlock *NewBB = SplitBlock(BB, BI, DTU, /*LI=*/nullptr,
4252                                    /*MSSAU=*/nullptr, "switch.early.test");
4253 
4254     // Remove the uncond branch added to the old block.
4255     Instruction *OldTI = BB->getTerminator();
4256     Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
4257 
4258     // There can be an unintended UB if extra values are Poison. Before the
4259     // transformation, extra values may not be evaluated according to the
4260     // condition, and it will not raise UB. But after transformation, we are
4261     // evaluating extra values before checking the condition, and it will raise
4262     // UB. It can be solved by adding freeze instruction to extra values.
4263     AssumptionCache *AC = Options.AC;
4264 
4265     if (!isGuaranteedNotToBeUndefOrPoison(ExtraCase, AC, BI, nullptr))
4266       ExtraCase = Builder.CreateFreeze(ExtraCase);
4267 
4268     if (TrueWhenEqual)
4269       Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, EdgeBB, NewBB);
4270     else
4271       Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, NewBB, EdgeBB);
4272 
4273     OldTI->eraseFromParent();
4274 
4275     if (DTU)
4276       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, BB, EdgeBB});
4277 
4278     // If there are PHI nodes in EdgeBB, then we need to add a new entry to them
4279     // for the edge we just added.
4280     AddPredecessorToBlock(EdgeBB, BB, NewBB);
4281 
4282     LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "  ** 'icmp' chain unhandled condition: " << *ExtraCase
4283                       << "\nEXTRABB = " << *BB);
4284     BB = NewBB;
4285   }
4286 
4287   Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
4288   // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
4289   if (CompVal->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
4290     CompVal = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(
4291         CompVal, DL.getIntPtrType(CompVal->getType()), "magicptr");
4292   }
4293 
4294   // Create the new switch instruction now.
4295   SwitchInst *New = Builder.CreateSwitch(CompVal, DefaultBB, Values.size());
4296 
4297   // Add all of the 'cases' to the switch instruction.
4298   for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size(); i != e; ++i)
4299     New->addCase(Values[i], EdgeBB);
4300 
4301   // We added edges from PI to the EdgeBB.  As such, if there were any
4302   // PHI nodes in EdgeBB, they need entries to be added corresponding to
4303   // the number of edges added.
4304   for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = EdgeBB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4305     PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
4306     Value *InVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
4307     for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size() - 1; i != e; ++i)
4308       PN->addIncoming(InVal, BB);
4309   }
4310 
4311   // Erase the old branch instruction.
4312   EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(BI);
4313   if (DTU)
4314     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
4315 
4316   LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "  ** 'icmp' chain result is:\n" << *BB << '\n');
4317   return true;
4318 }
4319 
4320 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
4321   if (isa<PHINode>(RI->getValue()))
4322     return simplifyCommonResume(RI);
4323   else if (isa<LandingPadInst>(RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI()) &&
4324            RI->getValue() == RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI())
4325     // The resume must unwind the exception that caused control to branch here.
4326     return simplifySingleResume(RI);
4327 
4328   return false;
4329 }
4330 
4331 // Check if cleanup block is empty
4332 static bool isCleanupBlockEmpty(iterator_range<BasicBlock::iterator> R) {
4333   for (Instruction &I : R) {
4334     auto *II = dyn_cast<IntrinsicInst>(&I);
4335     if (!II)
4336       return false;
4337 
4338     Intrinsic::ID IntrinsicID = II->getIntrinsicID();
4339     switch (IntrinsicID) {
4340     case Intrinsic::dbg_declare:
4341     case Intrinsic::dbg_value:
4342     case Intrinsic::dbg_label:
4343     case Intrinsic::lifetime_end:
4344       break;
4345     default:
4346       return false;
4347     }
4348   }
4349   return true;
4350 }
4351 
4352 // Simplify resume that is shared by several landing pads (phi of landing pad).
4353 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
4354   BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
4355 
4356   // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug and lifetime
4357   // intrinsics between the phi's and resume instruction.
4358   if (!isCleanupBlockEmpty(
4359           make_range(RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI(), BB->getTerminator())))
4360     return false;
4361 
4362   SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 4> TrivialUnwindBlocks;
4363   auto *PhiLPInst = cast<PHINode>(RI->getValue());
4364 
4365   // Check incoming blocks to see if any of them are trivial.
4366   for (unsigned Idx = 0, End = PhiLPInst->getNumIncomingValues(); Idx != End;
4367        Idx++) {
4368     auto *IncomingBB = PhiLPInst->getIncomingBlock(Idx);
4369     auto *IncomingValue = PhiLPInst->getIncomingValue(Idx);
4370 
4371     // If the block has other successors, we can not delete it because
4372     // it has other dependents.
4373     if (IncomingBB->getUniqueSuccessor() != BB)
4374       continue;
4375 
4376     auto *LandingPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI());
4377     // Not the landing pad that caused the control to branch here.
4378     if (IncomingValue != LandingPad)
4379       continue;
4380 
4381     if (isCleanupBlockEmpty(
4382             make_range(LandingPad->getNextNode(), IncomingBB->getTerminator())))
4383       TrivialUnwindBlocks.insert(IncomingBB);
4384   }
4385 
4386   // If no trivial unwind blocks, don't do any simplifications.
4387   if (TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty())
4388     return false;
4389 
4390   // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls.
4391   for (auto *TrivialBB : TrivialUnwindBlocks) {
4392     // Blocks that will be simplified should be removed from the phi node.
4393     // Note there could be multiple edges to the resume block, and we need
4394     // to remove them all.
4395     while (PhiLPInst->getBasicBlockIndex(TrivialBB) != -1)
4396       BB->removePredecessor(TrivialBB, true);
4397 
4398     for (BasicBlock *Pred :
4399          llvm::make_early_inc_range(predecessors(TrivialBB))) {
4400       removeUnwindEdge(Pred, DTU);
4401       ++NumInvokes;
4402     }
4403 
4404     // In each SimplifyCFG run, only the current processed block can be erased.
4405     // Otherwise, it will break the iteration of SimplifyCFG pass. So instead
4406     // of erasing TrivialBB, we only remove the branch to the common resume
4407     // block so that we can later erase the resume block since it has no
4408     // predecessors.
4409     TrivialBB->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent();
4410     new UnreachableInst(RI->getContext(), TrivialBB);
4411     if (DTU)
4412       DTU->applyUpdates({{DominatorTree::Delete, TrivialBB, BB}});
4413   }
4414 
4415   // Delete the resume block if all its predecessors have been removed.
4416   if (pred_empty(BB))
4417     DeleteDeadBlock(BB, DTU);
4418 
4419   return !TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty();
4420 }
4421 
4422 // Simplify resume that is only used by a single (non-phi) landing pad.
4423 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
4424   BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
4425   auto *LPInst = cast<LandingPadInst>(BB->getFirstNonPHI());
4426   assert(RI->getValue() == LPInst &&
4427          "Resume must unwind the exception that caused control to here");
4428 
4429   // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics.
4430   if (!isCleanupBlockEmpty(
4431           make_range<Instruction *>(LPInst->getNextNode(), RI)))
4432     return false;
4433 
4434   // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls and delete the basic block.
4435   for (BasicBlock *Pred : llvm::make_early_inc_range(predecessors(BB))) {
4436     removeUnwindEdge(Pred, DTU);
4437     ++NumInvokes;
4438   }
4439 
4440   // The landingpad is now unreachable.  Zap it.
4441   DeleteDeadBlock(BB, DTU);
4442   return true;
4443 }
4444 
4445 static bool removeEmptyCleanup(CleanupReturnInst *RI, DomTreeUpdater *DTU) {
4446   // If this is a trivial cleanup pad that executes no instructions, it can be
4447   // eliminated.  If the cleanup pad continues to the caller, any predecessor
4448   // that is an EH pad will be updated to continue to the caller and any
4449   // predecessor that terminates with an invoke instruction will have its invoke
4450   // instruction converted to a call instruction.  If the cleanup pad being
4451   // simplified does not continue to the caller, each predecessor will be
4452   // updated to continue to the unwind destination of the cleanup pad being
4453   // simplified.
4454   BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
4455   CleanupPadInst *CPInst = RI->getCleanupPad();
4456   if (CPInst->getParent() != BB)
4457     // This isn't an empty cleanup.
4458     return false;
4459 
4460   // We cannot kill the pad if it has multiple uses.  This typically arises
4461   // from unreachable basic blocks.
4462   if (!CPInst->hasOneUse())
4463     return false;
4464 
4465   // Check that there are no other instructions except for benign intrinsics.
4466   if (!isCleanupBlockEmpty(
4467           make_range<Instruction *>(CPInst->getNextNode(), RI)))
4468     return false;
4469 
4470   // If the cleanup return we are simplifying unwinds to the caller, this will
4471   // set UnwindDest to nullptr.
4472   BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
4473   Instruction *DestEHPad = UnwindDest ? UnwindDest->getFirstNonPHI() : nullptr;
4474 
4475   // We're about to remove BB from the control flow.  Before we do, sink any
4476   // PHINodes into the unwind destination.  Doing this before changing the
4477   // control flow avoids some potentially slow checks, since we can currently
4478   // be certain that UnwindDest and BB have no common predecessors (since they
4479   // are both EH pads).
4480   if (UnwindDest) {
4481     // First, go through the PHI nodes in UnwindDest and update any nodes that
4482     // reference the block we are removing
4483     for (PHINode &DestPN : UnwindDest->phis()) {
4484       int Idx = DestPN.getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
4485       // Since BB unwinds to UnwindDest, it has to be in the PHI node.
4486       assert(Idx != -1);
4487       // This PHI node has an incoming value that corresponds to a control
4488       // path through the cleanup pad we are removing.  If the incoming
4489       // value is in the cleanup pad, it must be a PHINode (because we
4490       // verified above that the block is otherwise empty).  Otherwise, the
4491       // value is either a constant or a value that dominates the cleanup
4492       // pad being removed.
4493       //
4494       // Because BB and UnwindDest are both EH pads, all of their
4495       // predecessors must unwind to these blocks, and since no instruction
4496       // can have multiple unwind destinations, there will be no overlap in
4497       // incoming blocks between SrcPN and DestPN.
4498       Value *SrcVal = DestPN.getIncomingValue(Idx);
4499       PHINode *SrcPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(SrcVal);
4500 
4501       bool NeedPHITranslation = SrcPN && SrcPN->getParent() == BB;
4502       for (auto *Pred : predecessors(BB)) {
4503         Value *Incoming =
4504             NeedPHITranslation ? SrcPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(Pred) : SrcVal;
4505         DestPN.addIncoming(Incoming, Pred);
4506       }
4507     }
4508 
4509     // Sink any remaining PHI nodes directly into UnwindDest.
4510     Instruction *InsertPt = DestEHPad;
4511     for (PHINode &PN : make_early_inc_range(BB->phis())) {
4512       if (PN.use_empty() || !PN.isUsedOutsideOfBlock(BB))
4513         // If the PHI node has no uses or all of its uses are in this basic
4514         // block (meaning they are debug or lifetime intrinsics), just leave
4515         // it.  It will be erased when we erase BB below.
4516         continue;
4517 
4518       // Otherwise, sink this PHI node into UnwindDest.
4519       // Any predecessors to UnwindDest which are not already represented
4520       // must be back edges which inherit the value from the path through
4521       // BB.  In this case, the PHI value must reference itself.
4522       for (auto *pred : predecessors(UnwindDest))
4523         if (pred != BB)
4524           PN.addIncoming(&PN, pred);
4525       PN.moveBefore(InsertPt);
4526       // Also, add a dummy incoming value for the original BB itself,
4527       // so that the PHI is well-formed until we drop said predecessor.
4528       PN.addIncoming(UndefValue::get(PN.getType()), BB);
4529     }
4530   }
4531 
4532   std::vector<DominatorTree::UpdateType> Updates;
4533 
4534   // We use make_early_inc_range here because we will remove all predecessors.
4535   for (BasicBlock *PredBB : llvm::make_early_inc_range(predecessors(BB))) {
4536     if (UnwindDest == nullptr) {
4537       if (DTU) {
4538         DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
4539         Updates.clear();
4540       }
4541       removeUnwindEdge(PredBB, DTU);
4542       ++NumInvokes;
4543     } else {
4544       BB->removePredecessor(PredBB);
4545       Instruction *TI = PredBB->getTerminator();
4546       TI->replaceUsesOfWith(BB, UnwindDest);
4547       if (DTU) {
4548         Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, PredBB, UnwindDest});
4549         Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, PredBB, BB});
4550       }
4551     }
4552   }
4553 
4554   if (DTU)
4555     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
4556 
4557   DeleteDeadBlock(BB, DTU);
4558 
4559   return true;
4560 }
4561 
4562 // Try to merge two cleanuppads together.
4563 static bool mergeCleanupPad(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
4564   // Skip any cleanuprets which unwind to caller, there is nothing to merge
4565   // with.
4566   BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
4567   if (!UnwindDest)
4568     return false;
4569 
4570   // This cleanupret isn't the only predecessor of this cleanuppad, it wouldn't
4571   // be safe to merge without code duplication.
4572   if (UnwindDest->getSinglePredecessor() != RI->getParent())
4573     return false;
4574 
4575   // Verify that our cleanuppad's unwind destination is another cleanuppad.
4576   auto *SuccessorCleanupPad = dyn_cast<CleanupPadInst>(&UnwindDest->front());
4577   if (!SuccessorCleanupPad)
4578     return false;
4579 
4580   CleanupPadInst *PredecessorCleanupPad = RI->getCleanupPad();
4581   // Replace any uses of the successor cleanupad with the predecessor pad
4582   // The only cleanuppad uses should be this cleanupret, it's cleanupret and
4583   // funclet bundle operands.
4584   SuccessorCleanupPad->replaceAllUsesWith(PredecessorCleanupPad);
4585   // Remove the old cleanuppad.
4586   SuccessorCleanupPad->eraseFromParent();
4587   // Now, we simply replace the cleanupret with a branch to the unwind
4588   // destination.
4589   BranchInst::Create(UnwindDest, RI->getParent());
4590   RI->eraseFromParent();
4591 
4592   return true;
4593 }
4594 
4595 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
4596   // It is possible to transiantly have an undef cleanuppad operand because we
4597   // have deleted some, but not all, dead blocks.
4598   // Eventually, this block will be deleted.
4599   if (isa<UndefValue>(RI->getOperand(0)))
4600     return false;
4601 
4602   if (mergeCleanupPad(RI))
4603     return true;
4604 
4605   if (removeEmptyCleanup(RI, DTU))
4606     return true;
4607 
4608   return false;
4609 }
4610 
4611 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
4612   BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
4613   if (!BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
4614     return false;
4615 
4616   // Find predecessors that end with branches.
4617   SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> UncondBranchPreds;
4618   SmallVector<BranchInst *, 8> CondBranchPreds;
4619   for (BasicBlock *P : predecessors(BB)) {
4620     Instruction *PTI = P->getTerminator();
4621     if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PTI)) {
4622       if (BI->isUnconditional())
4623         UncondBranchPreds.push_back(P);
4624       else
4625         CondBranchPreds.push_back(BI);
4626     }
4627   }
4628 
4629   // If we found some, do the transformation!
4630   if (!UncondBranchPreds.empty() && DupRet) {
4631     while (!UncondBranchPreds.empty()) {
4632       BasicBlock *Pred = UncondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
4633       LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING: " << *BB
4634                         << "INTO UNCOND BRANCH PRED: " << *Pred);
4635       (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RI, BB, Pred, DTU);
4636     }
4637 
4638     // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now.
4639     if (pred_empty(BB))
4640       DeleteDeadBlock(BB, DTU);
4641 
4642     return true;
4643   }
4644 
4645   // Check out all of the conditional branches going to this return
4646   // instruction.  If any of them just select between returns, change the
4647   // branch itself into a select/return pair.
4648   while (!CondBranchPreds.empty()) {
4649     BranchInst *BI = CondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
4650 
4651     // Check to see if the non-BB successor is also a return block.
4652     if (isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator()) &&
4653         isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator()) &&
4654         SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BI, Builder))
4655       return true;
4656   }
4657   return false;
4658 }
4659 
4660 // WARNING: keep in sync with InstCombinerImpl::visitUnreachableInst()!
4661 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI) {
4662   BasicBlock *BB = UI->getParent();
4663 
4664   bool Changed = false;
4665 
4666   // If there are any instructions immediately before the unreachable that can
4667   // be removed, do so.
4668   while (UI->getIterator() != BB->begin()) {
4669     BasicBlock::iterator BBI = UI->getIterator();
4670     --BBI;
4671 
4672     if (!isGuaranteedToTransferExecutionToSuccessor(&*BBI))
4673       break; // Can not drop any more instructions. We're done here.
4674     // Otherwise, this instruction can be freely erased,
4675     // even if it is not side-effect free.
4676 
4677     // Temporarily disable removal of volatile stores preceding unreachable,
4678     // pending a potential LangRef change permitting volatile stores to trap.
4679     // TODO: Either remove this code, or properly integrate the check into
4680     // isGuaranteedToTransferExecutionToSuccessor().
4681     if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&*BBI))
4682       if (SI->isVolatile())
4683         break; // Can not drop this instruction. We're done here.
4684 
4685     // Note that deleting EH's here is in fact okay, although it involves a bit
4686     // of subtle reasoning. If this inst is an EH, all the predecessors of this
4687     // block will be the unwind edges of Invoke/CatchSwitch/CleanupReturn,
4688     // and we can therefore guarantee this block will be erased.
4689 
4690     // Delete this instruction (any uses are guaranteed to be dead)
4691     BBI->replaceAllUsesWith(PoisonValue::get(BBI->getType()));
4692     BBI->eraseFromParent();
4693     Changed = true;
4694   }
4695 
4696   // If the unreachable instruction is the first in the block, take a gander
4697   // at all of the predecessors of this instruction, and simplify them.
4698   if (&BB->front() != UI)
4699     return Changed;
4700 
4701   std::vector<DominatorTree::UpdateType> Updates;
4702 
4703   SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 8> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
4704   for (unsigned i = 0, e = Preds.size(); i != e; ++i) {
4705     auto *Predecessor = Preds[i];
4706     Instruction *TI = Predecessor->getTerminator();
4707     IRBuilder<> Builder(TI);
4708     if (auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
4709       // We could either have a proper unconditional branch,
4710       // or a degenerate conditional branch with matching destinations.
4711       if (all_of(BI->successors(),
4712                  [BB](auto *Successor) { return Successor == BB; })) {
4713         new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
4714         TI->eraseFromParent();
4715         Changed = true;
4716       } else {
4717         assert(BI->isConditional() && "Can't get here with an uncond branch.");
4718         Value* Cond = BI->getCondition();
4719         assert(BI->getSuccessor(0) != BI->getSuccessor(1) &&
4720                "The destinations are guaranteed to be different here.");
4721         if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
4722           Builder.CreateAssumption(Builder.CreateNot(Cond));
4723           Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(1));
4724         } else {
4725           assert(BI->getSuccessor(1) == BB && "Incorrect CFG");
4726           Builder.CreateAssumption(Cond);
4727           Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0));
4728         }
4729         EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(BI);
4730         Changed = true;
4731       }
4732       if (DTU)
4733         Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, Predecessor, BB});
4734     } else if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
4735       SwitchInstProfUpdateWrapper SU(*SI);
4736       for (auto i = SU->case_begin(), e = SU->case_end(); i != e;) {
4737         if (i->getCaseSuccessor() != BB) {
4738           ++i;
4739           continue;
4740         }
4741         BB->removePredecessor(SU->getParent());
4742         i = SU.removeCase(i);
4743         e = SU->case_end();
4744         Changed = true;
4745       }
4746       // Note that the default destination can't be removed!
4747       if (DTU && SI->getDefaultDest() != BB)
4748         Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, Predecessor, BB});
4749     } else if (auto *II = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(TI)) {
4750       if (II->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
4751         if (DTU) {
4752           DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
4753           Updates.clear();
4754         }
4755         removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent(), DTU);
4756         Changed = true;
4757       }
4758     } else if (auto *CSI = dyn_cast<CatchSwitchInst>(TI)) {
4759       if (CSI->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
4760         if (DTU) {
4761           DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
4762           Updates.clear();
4763         }
4764         removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent(), DTU);
4765         Changed = true;
4766         continue;
4767       }
4768 
4769       for (CatchSwitchInst::handler_iterator I = CSI->handler_begin(),
4770                                              E = CSI->handler_end();
4771            I != E; ++I) {
4772         if (*I == BB) {
4773           CSI->removeHandler(I);
4774           --I;
4775           --E;
4776           Changed = true;
4777         }
4778       }
4779       if (DTU)
4780         Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, Predecessor, BB});
4781       if (CSI->getNumHandlers() == 0) {
4782         if (CSI->hasUnwindDest()) {
4783           // Redirect all predecessors of the block containing CatchSwitchInst
4784           // to instead branch to the CatchSwitchInst's unwind destination.
4785           if (DTU) {
4786             for (auto *PredecessorOfPredecessor : predecessors(Predecessor)) {
4787               Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert,
4788                                  PredecessorOfPredecessor,
4789                                  CSI->getUnwindDest()});
4790               Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete,
4791                                  PredecessorOfPredecessor, Predecessor});
4792             }
4793           }
4794           Predecessor->replaceAllUsesWith(CSI->getUnwindDest());
4795         } else {
4796           // Rewrite all preds to unwind to caller (or from invoke to call).
4797           if (DTU) {
4798             DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
4799             Updates.clear();
4800           }
4801           SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> EHPreds(predecessors(Predecessor));
4802           for (BasicBlock *EHPred : EHPreds)
4803             removeUnwindEdge(EHPred, DTU);
4804         }
4805         // The catchswitch is no longer reachable.
4806         new UnreachableInst(CSI->getContext(), CSI);
4807         CSI->eraseFromParent();
4808         Changed = true;
4809       }
4810     } else if (auto *CRI = dyn_cast<CleanupReturnInst>(TI)) {
4811       (void)CRI;
4812       assert(CRI->hasUnwindDest() && CRI->getUnwindDest() == BB &&
4813              "Expected to always have an unwind to BB.");
4814       if (DTU)
4815         Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, Predecessor, BB});
4816       new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
4817       TI->eraseFromParent();
4818       Changed = true;
4819     }
4820   }
4821 
4822   if (DTU)
4823     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
4824 
4825   // If this block is now dead, remove it.
4826   if (pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) {
4827     DeleteDeadBlock(BB, DTU);
4828     return true;
4829   }
4830 
4831   return Changed;
4832 }
4833 
4834 static bool CasesAreContiguous(SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Cases) {
4835   assert(Cases.size() >= 1);
4836 
4837   array_pod_sort(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
4838   for (size_t I = 1, E = Cases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4839     if (Cases[I - 1]->getValue() != Cases[I]->getValue() + 1)
4840       return false;
4841   }
4842   return true;
4843 }
4844 
4845 static void createUnreachableSwitchDefault(SwitchInst *Switch,
4846                                            DomTreeUpdater *DTU) {
4847   LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch default is dead.\n");
4848   auto *BB = Switch->getParent();
4849   BasicBlock *NewDefaultBlock = SplitBlockPredecessors(
4850       Switch->getDefaultDest(), Switch->getParent(), "", DTU);
4851   auto *OrigDefaultBlock = Switch->getDefaultDest();
4852   Switch->setDefaultDest(&*NewDefaultBlock);
4853   if (DTU)
4854     DTU->applyUpdates({{DominatorTree::Insert, BB, &*NewDefaultBlock},
4855                        {DominatorTree::Delete, BB, OrigDefaultBlock}});
4856   SplitBlock(&*NewDefaultBlock, &NewDefaultBlock->front(), DTU);
4857   SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 2> Updates;
4858   if (DTU)
4859     for (auto *Successor : successors(NewDefaultBlock))
4860       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, NewDefaultBlock, Successor});
4861   auto *NewTerminator = NewDefaultBlock->getTerminator();
4862   new UnreachableInst(Switch->getContext(), NewTerminator);
4863   EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(NewTerminator);
4864   if (DTU)
4865     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
4866 }
4867 
4868 /// Turn a switch with two reachable destinations into an integer range
4869 /// comparison and branch.
4870 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI,
4871                                              IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
4872   assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
4873 
4874   bool HasDefault =
4875       !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
4876 
4877   auto *BB = SI->getParent();
4878 
4879   // Partition the cases into two sets with different destinations.
4880   BasicBlock *DestA = HasDefault ? SI->getDefaultDest() : nullptr;
4881   BasicBlock *DestB = nullptr;
4882   SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesA;
4883   SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesB;
4884 
4885   for (auto Case : SI->cases()) {
4886     BasicBlock *Dest = Case.getCaseSuccessor();
4887     if (!DestA)
4888       DestA = Dest;
4889     if (Dest == DestA) {
4890       CasesA.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
4891       continue;
4892     }
4893     if (!DestB)
4894       DestB = Dest;
4895     if (Dest == DestB) {
4896       CasesB.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
4897       continue;
4898     }
4899     return false; // More than two destinations.
4900   }
4901 
4902   assert(DestA && DestB &&
4903          "Single-destination switch should have been folded.");
4904   assert(DestA != DestB);
4905   assert(DestB != SI->getDefaultDest());
4906   assert(!CasesB.empty() && "There must be non-default cases.");
4907   assert(!CasesA.empty() || HasDefault);
4908 
4909   // Figure out if one of the sets of cases form a contiguous range.
4910   SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> *ContiguousCases = nullptr;
4911   BasicBlock *ContiguousDest = nullptr;
4912   BasicBlock *OtherDest = nullptr;
4913   if (!CasesA.empty() && CasesAreContiguous(CasesA)) {
4914     ContiguousCases = &CasesA;
4915     ContiguousDest = DestA;
4916     OtherDest = DestB;
4917   } else if (CasesAreContiguous(CasesB)) {
4918     ContiguousCases = &CasesB;
4919     ContiguousDest = DestB;
4920     OtherDest = DestA;
4921   } else
4922     return false;
4923 
4924   // Start building the compare and branch.
4925 
4926   Constant *Offset = ConstantExpr::getNeg(ContiguousCases->back());
4927   Constant *NumCases =
4928       ConstantInt::get(Offset->getType(), ContiguousCases->size());
4929 
4930   Value *Sub = SI->getCondition();
4931   if (!Offset->isNullValue())
4932     Sub = Builder.CreateAdd(Sub, Offset, Sub->getName() + ".off");
4933 
4934   Value *Cmp;
4935   // If NumCases overflowed, then all possible values jump to the successor.
4936   if (NumCases->isNullValue() && !ContiguousCases->empty())
4937     Cmp = ConstantInt::getTrue(SI->getContext());
4938   else
4939     Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(Sub, NumCases, "switch");
4940   BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, ContiguousDest, OtherDest);
4941 
4942   // Update weight for the newly-created conditional branch.
4943   if (HasBranchWeights(SI)) {
4944     SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
4945     GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4946     if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
4947       uint64_t TrueWeight = 0;
4948       uint64_t FalseWeight = 0;
4949       for (size_t I = 0, E = Weights.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4950         if (SI->getSuccessor(I) == ContiguousDest)
4951           TrueWeight += Weights[I];
4952         else
4953           FalseWeight += Weights[I];
4954       }
4955       while (TrueWeight > UINT32_MAX || FalseWeight > UINT32_MAX) {
4956         TrueWeight /= 2;
4957         FalseWeight /= 2;
4958       }
4959       setBranchWeights(NewBI, TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
4960     }
4961   }
4962 
4963   // Prune obsolete incoming values off the successors' PHI nodes.
4964   for (auto BBI = ContiguousDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4965     unsigned PreviousEdges = ContiguousCases->size();
4966     if (ContiguousDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4967       ++PreviousEdges;
4968     for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
4969       cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4970   }
4971   for (auto BBI = OtherDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4972     unsigned PreviousEdges = SI->getNumCases() - ContiguousCases->size();
4973     if (OtherDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4974       ++PreviousEdges;
4975     for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
4976       cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4977   }
4978 
4979   // Clean up the default block - it may have phis or other instructions before
4980   // the unreachable terminator.
4981   if (!HasDefault)
4982     createUnreachableSwitchDefault(SI, DTU);
4983 
4984   auto *UnreachableDefault = SI->getDefaultDest();
4985 
4986   // Drop the switch.
4987   SI->eraseFromParent();
4988 
4989   if (!HasDefault && DTU)
4990     DTU->applyUpdates({{DominatorTree::Delete, BB, UnreachableDefault}});
4991 
4992   return true;
4993 }
4994 
4995 /// Compute masked bits for the condition of a switch
4996 /// and use it to remove dead cases.
4997 static bool eliminateDeadSwitchCases(SwitchInst *SI, DomTreeUpdater *DTU,
4998                                      AssumptionCache *AC,
4999                                      const DataLayout &DL) {
5000   Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
5001   unsigned Bits = Cond->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth();
5002   KnownBits Known = computeKnownBits(Cond, DL, 0, AC, SI);
5003 
5004   // We can also eliminate cases by determining that their values are outside of
5005   // the limited range of the condition based on how many significant (non-sign)
5006   // bits are in the condition value.
5007   unsigned ExtraSignBits = ComputeNumSignBits(Cond, DL, 0, AC, SI) - 1;
5008   unsigned MaxSignificantBitsInCond = Bits - ExtraSignBits;
5009 
5010   // Gather dead cases.
5011   SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> DeadCases;
5012   SmallDenseMap<BasicBlock *, int, 8> NumPerSuccessorCases;
5013   for (auto &Case : SI->cases()) {
5014     auto *Successor = Case.getCaseSuccessor();
5015     if (DTU)
5016       ++NumPerSuccessorCases[Successor];
5017     const APInt &CaseVal = Case.getCaseValue()->getValue();
5018     if (Known.Zero.intersects(CaseVal) || !Known.One.isSubsetOf(CaseVal) ||
5019         (CaseVal.getMinSignedBits() > MaxSignificantBitsInCond)) {
5020       DeadCases.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
5021       if (DTU)
5022         --NumPerSuccessorCases[Successor];
5023       LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch case " << CaseVal
5024                         << " is dead.\n");
5025     }
5026   }
5027 
5028   // If we can prove that the cases must cover all possible values, the
5029   // default destination becomes dead and we can remove it.  If we know some
5030   // of the bits in the value, we can use that to more precisely compute the
5031   // number of possible unique case values.
5032   bool HasDefault =
5033       !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
5034   const unsigned NumUnknownBits =
5035       Bits - (Known.Zero | Known.One).countPopulation();
5036   assert(NumUnknownBits <= Bits);
5037   if (HasDefault && DeadCases.empty() &&
5038       NumUnknownBits < 64 /* avoid overflow */ &&
5039       SI->getNumCases() == (1ULL << NumUnknownBits)) {
5040     createUnreachableSwitchDefault(SI, DTU);
5041     return true;
5042   }
5043 
5044   if (DeadCases.empty())
5045     return false;
5046 
5047   SwitchInstProfUpdateWrapper SIW(*SI);
5048   for (ConstantInt *DeadCase : DeadCases) {
5049     SwitchInst::CaseIt CaseI = SI->findCaseValue(DeadCase);
5050     assert(CaseI != SI->case_default() &&
5051            "Case was not found. Probably mistake in DeadCases forming.");
5052     // Prune unused values from PHI nodes.
5053     CaseI->getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
5054     SIW.removeCase(CaseI);
5055   }
5056 
5057   if (DTU) {
5058     std::vector<DominatorTree::UpdateType> Updates;
5059     for (const std::pair<BasicBlock *, int> &I : NumPerSuccessorCases)
5060       if (I.second == 0)
5061         Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, SI->getParent(), I.first});
5062     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
5063   }
5064 
5065   return true;
5066 }
5067 
5068 /// If BB would be eligible for simplification by
5069 /// TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock (i.e. it is empty and terminated
5070 /// by an unconditional branch), look at the phi node for BB in the successor
5071 /// block and see if the incoming value is equal to CaseValue. If so, return
5072 /// the phi node, and set PhiIndex to BB's index in the phi node.
5073 static PHINode *FindPHIForConditionForwarding(ConstantInt *CaseValue,
5074                                               BasicBlock *BB, int *PhiIndex) {
5075   if (BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg() != BB->getTerminator())
5076     return nullptr; // BB must be empty to be a candidate for simplification.
5077   if (!BB->getSinglePredecessor())
5078     return nullptr; // BB must be dominated by the switch.
5079 
5080   BranchInst *Branch = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
5081   if (!Branch || !Branch->isUnconditional())
5082     return nullptr; // Terminator must be unconditional branch.
5083 
5084   BasicBlock *Succ = Branch->getSuccessor(0);
5085 
5086   for (PHINode &PHI : Succ->phis()) {
5087     int Idx = PHI.getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
5088     assert(Idx >= 0 && "PHI has no entry for predecessor?");
5089 
5090     Value *InValue = PHI.getIncomingValue(Idx);
5091     if (InValue != CaseValue)
5092       continue;
5093 
5094     *PhiIndex = Idx;
5095     return &PHI;
5096   }
5097 
5098   return nullptr;
5099 }
5100 
5101 /// Try to forward the condition of a switch instruction to a phi node
5102 /// dominated by the switch, if that would mean that some of the destination
5103 /// blocks of the switch can be folded away. Return true if a change is made.
5104 static bool ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SwitchInst *SI) {
5105   using ForwardingNodesMap = DenseMap<PHINode *, SmallVector<int, 4>>;
5106 
5107   ForwardingNodesMap ForwardingNodes;
5108   BasicBlock *SwitchBlock = SI->getParent();
5109   bool Changed = false;
5110   for (auto &Case : SI->cases()) {
5111     ConstantInt *CaseValue = Case.getCaseValue();
5112     BasicBlock *CaseDest = Case.getCaseSuccessor();
5113 
5114     // Replace phi operands in successor blocks that are using the constant case
5115     // value rather than the switch condition variable:
5116     //   switchbb:
5117     //   switch i32 %x, label %default [
5118     //     i32 17, label %succ
5119     //   ...
5120     //   succ:
5121     //     %r = phi i32 ... [ 17, %switchbb ] ...
5122     // -->
5123     //     %r = phi i32 ... [ %x, %switchbb ] ...
5124 
5125     for (PHINode &Phi : CaseDest->phis()) {
5126       // This only works if there is exactly 1 incoming edge from the switch to
5127       // a phi. If there is >1, that means multiple cases of the switch map to 1
5128       // value in the phi, and that phi value is not the switch condition. Thus,
5129       // this transform would not make sense (the phi would be invalid because
5130       // a phi can't have different incoming values from the same block).
5131       int SwitchBBIdx = Phi.getBasicBlockIndex(SwitchBlock);
5132       if (Phi.getIncomingValue(SwitchBBIdx) == CaseValue &&
5133           count(Phi.blocks(), SwitchBlock) == 1) {
5134         Phi.setIncomingValue(SwitchBBIdx, SI->getCondition());
5135         Changed = true;
5136       }
5137     }
5138 
5139     // Collect phi nodes that are indirectly using this switch's case constants.
5140     int PhiIdx;
5141     if (auto *Phi = FindPHIForConditionForwarding(CaseValue, CaseDest, &PhiIdx))
5142       ForwardingNodes[Phi].push_back(PhiIdx);
5143   }
5144 
5145   for (auto &ForwardingNode : ForwardingNodes) {
5146     PHINode *Phi = ForwardingNode.first;
5147     SmallVectorImpl<int> &Indexes = ForwardingNode.second;
5148     if (Indexes.size() < 2)
5149       continue;
5150 
5151     for (int Index : Indexes)
5152       Phi->setIncomingValue(Index, SI->getCondition());
5153     Changed = true;
5154   }
5155 
5156   return Changed;
5157 }
5158 
5159 /// Return true if the backend will be able to handle
5160 /// initializing an array of constants like C.
5161 static bool ValidLookupTableConstant(Constant *C, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
5162   if (C->isThreadDependent())
5163     return false;
5164   if (C->isDLLImportDependent())
5165     return false;
5166 
5167   if (!isa<ConstantFP>(C) && !isa<ConstantInt>(C) &&
5168       !isa<ConstantPointerNull>(C) && !isa<GlobalValue>(C) &&
5169       !isa<UndefValue>(C) && !isa<ConstantExpr>(C))
5170     return false;
5171 
5172   if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(C)) {
5173     if (!CE->isGEPWithNoNotionalOverIndexing())
5174       return false;
5175     if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(CE->getOperand(0), TTI))
5176       return false;
5177   }
5178 
5179   if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTablesForConstant(C))
5180     return false;
5181 
5182   return true;
5183 }
5184 
5185 /// If V is a Constant, return it. Otherwise, try to look up
5186 /// its constant value in ConstantPool, returning 0 if it's not there.
5187 static Constant *
5188 LookupConstant(Value *V,
5189                const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
5190   if (Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V))
5191     return C;
5192   return ConstantPool.lookup(V);
5193 }
5194 
5195 /// Try to fold instruction I into a constant. This works for
5196 /// simple instructions such as binary operations where both operands are
5197 /// constant or can be replaced by constants from the ConstantPool. Returns the
5198 /// resulting constant on success, 0 otherwise.
5199 static Constant *
5200 ConstantFold(Instruction *I, const DataLayout &DL,
5201              const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
5202   if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I)) {
5203     Constant *A = LookupConstant(Select->getCondition(), ConstantPool);
5204     if (!A)
5205       return nullptr;
5206     if (A->isAllOnesValue())
5207       return LookupConstant(Select->getTrueValue(), ConstantPool);
5208     if (A->isNullValue())
5209       return LookupConstant(Select->getFalseValue(), ConstantPool);
5210     return nullptr;
5211   }
5212 
5213   SmallVector<Constant *, 4> COps;
5214   for (unsigned N = 0, E = I->getNumOperands(); N != E; ++N) {
5215     if (Constant *A = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(N), ConstantPool))
5216       COps.push_back(A);
5217     else
5218       return nullptr;
5219   }
5220 
5221   if (CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I)) {
5222     return ConstantFoldCompareInstOperands(Cmp->getPredicate(), COps[0],
5223                                            COps[1], DL);
5224   }
5225 
5226   return ConstantFoldInstOperands(I, COps, DL);
5227 }
5228 
5229 /// Try to determine the resulting constant values in phi nodes
5230 /// at the common destination basic block, *CommonDest, for one of the case
5231 /// destionations CaseDest corresponding to value CaseVal (0 for the default
5232 /// case), of a switch instruction SI.
5233 static bool
5234 GetCaseResults(SwitchInst *SI, ConstantInt *CaseVal, BasicBlock *CaseDest,
5235                BasicBlock **CommonDest,
5236                SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>> &Res,
5237                const DataLayout &DL, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
5238   // The block from which we enter the common destination.
5239   BasicBlock *Pred = SI->getParent();
5240 
5241   // If CaseDest is empty except for some side-effect free instructions through
5242   // which we can constant-propagate the CaseVal, continue to its successor.
5243   SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> ConstantPool;
5244   ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(SI->getCondition(), CaseVal));
5245   for (Instruction &I :CaseDest->instructionsWithoutDebug()) {
5246     if (I.isTerminator()) {
5247       // If the terminator is a simple branch, continue to the next block.
5248       if (I.getNumSuccessors() != 1 || I.isExceptionalTerminator())
5249         return false;
5250       Pred = CaseDest;
5251       CaseDest = I.getSuccessor(0);
5252     } else if (Constant *C = ConstantFold(&I, DL, ConstantPool)) {
5253       // Instruction is side-effect free and constant.
5254 
5255       // If the instruction has uses outside this block or a phi node slot for
5256       // the block, it is not safe to bypass the instruction since it would then
5257       // no longer dominate all its uses.
5258       for (auto &Use : I.uses()) {
5259         User *User = Use.getUser();
5260         if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(User))
5261           if (I->getParent() == CaseDest)
5262             continue;
5263         if (PHINode *Phi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(User))
5264           if (Phi->getIncomingBlock(Use) == CaseDest)
5265             continue;
5266         return false;
5267       }
5268 
5269       ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(&I, C));
5270     } else {
5271       break;
5272     }
5273   }
5274 
5275   // If we did not have a CommonDest before, use the current one.
5276   if (!*CommonDest)
5277     *CommonDest = CaseDest;
5278   // If the destination isn't the common one, abort.
5279   if (CaseDest != *CommonDest)
5280     return false;
5281 
5282   // Get the values for this case from phi nodes in the destination block.
5283   for (PHINode &PHI : (*CommonDest)->phis()) {
5284     int Idx = PHI.getBasicBlockIndex(Pred);
5285     if (Idx == -1)
5286       continue;
5287 
5288     Constant *ConstVal =
5289         LookupConstant(PHI.getIncomingValue(Idx), ConstantPool);
5290     if (!ConstVal)
5291       return false;
5292 
5293     // Be conservative about which kinds of constants we support.
5294     if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(ConstVal, TTI))
5295       return false;
5296 
5297     Res.push_back(std::make_pair(&PHI, ConstVal));
5298   }
5299 
5300   return Res.size() > 0;
5301 }
5302 
5303 // Helper function used to add CaseVal to the list of cases that generate
5304 // Result. Returns the updated number of cases that generate this result.
5305 static uintptr_t MapCaseToResult(ConstantInt *CaseVal,
5306                                  SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
5307                                  Constant *Result) {
5308   for (auto &I : UniqueResults) {
5309     if (I.first == Result) {
5310       I.second.push_back(CaseVal);
5311       return I.second.size();
5312     }
5313   }
5314   UniqueResults.push_back(
5315       std::make_pair(Result, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>(1, CaseVal)));
5316   return 1;
5317 }
5318 
5319 // Helper function that initializes a map containing
5320 // results for the PHI node of the common destination block for a switch
5321 // instruction. Returns false if multiple PHI nodes have been found or if
5322 // there is not a common destination block for the switch.
5323 static bool
5324 InitializeUniqueCases(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *&PHI, BasicBlock *&CommonDest,
5325                       SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
5326                       Constant *&DefaultResult, const DataLayout &DL,
5327                       const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
5328                       uintptr_t MaxUniqueResults, uintptr_t MaxCasesPerResult) {
5329   for (auto &I : SI->cases()) {
5330     ConstantInt *CaseVal = I.getCaseValue();
5331 
5332     // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
5333     SwitchCaseResultsTy Results;
5334     if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, I.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest, Results,
5335                         DL, TTI))
5336       return false;
5337 
5338     // Only one value per case is permitted.
5339     if (Results.size() > 1)
5340       return false;
5341 
5342     // Add the case->result mapping to UniqueResults.
5343     const uintptr_t NumCasesForResult =
5344         MapCaseToResult(CaseVal, UniqueResults, Results.begin()->second);
5345 
5346     // Early out if there are too many cases for this result.
5347     if (NumCasesForResult > MaxCasesPerResult)
5348       return false;
5349 
5350     // Early out if there are too many unique results.
5351     if (UniqueResults.size() > MaxUniqueResults)
5352       return false;
5353 
5354     // Check the PHI consistency.
5355     if (!PHI)
5356       PHI = Results[0].first;
5357     else if (PHI != Results[0].first)
5358       return false;
5359   }
5360   // Find the default result value.
5361   SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 1> DefaultResults;
5362   BasicBlock *DefaultDest = SI->getDefaultDest();
5363   GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest, DefaultResults,
5364                  DL, TTI);
5365   // If the default value is not found abort unless the default destination
5366   // is unreachable.
5367   DefaultResult =
5368       DefaultResults.size() == 1 ? DefaultResults.begin()->second : nullptr;
5369   if ((!DefaultResult &&
5370        !isa<UnreachableInst>(DefaultDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg())))
5371     return false;
5372 
5373   return true;
5374 }
5375 
5376 // Helper function that checks if it is possible to transform a switch with only
5377 // two cases (or two cases + default) that produces a result into a select.
5378 // Example:
5379 // switch (a) {
5380 //   case 10:                %0 = icmp eq i32 %a, 10
5381 //     return 10;            %1 = select i1 %0, i32 10, i32 4
5382 //   case 20:        ---->   %2 = icmp eq i32 %a, 20
5383 //     return 2;             %3 = select i1 %2, i32 2, i32 %1
5384 //   default:
5385 //     return 4;
5386 // }
5387 static Value *ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(const SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &ResultVector,
5388                                    Constant *DefaultResult, Value *Condition,
5389                                    IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
5390   // If we are selecting between only two cases transform into a simple
5391   // select or a two-way select if default is possible.
5392   if (ResultVector.size() == 2 && ResultVector[0].second.size() == 1 &&
5393       ResultVector[1].second.size() == 1) {
5394     ConstantInt *const FirstCase = ResultVector[0].second[0];
5395     ConstantInt *const SecondCase = ResultVector[1].second[0];
5396 
5397     bool DefaultCanTrigger = DefaultResult;
5398     Value *SelectValue = ResultVector[1].first;
5399     if (DefaultCanTrigger) {
5400       Value *const ValueCompare =
5401           Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, SecondCase, "switch.selectcmp");
5402       SelectValue = Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[1].first,
5403                                          DefaultResult, "switch.select");
5404     }
5405     Value *const ValueCompare =
5406         Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, FirstCase, "switch.selectcmp");
5407     return Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[0].first,
5408                                 SelectValue, "switch.select");
5409   }
5410 
5411   // Handle the degenerate case where two cases have the same value.
5412   if (ResultVector.size() == 1 && ResultVector[0].second.size() == 2 &&
5413       DefaultResult) {
5414     Value *Cmp1 = Builder.CreateICmpEQ(
5415         Condition, ResultVector[0].second[0], "switch.selectcmp.case1");
5416     Value *Cmp2 = Builder.CreateICmpEQ(
5417         Condition, ResultVector[0].second[1], "switch.selectcmp.case2");
5418     Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateOr(Cmp1, Cmp2, "switch.selectcmp");
5419     return Builder.CreateSelect(Cmp, ResultVector[0].first, DefaultResult);
5420   }
5421 
5422   return nullptr;
5423 }
5424 
5425 // Helper function to cleanup a switch instruction that has been converted into
5426 // a select, fixing up PHI nodes and basic blocks.
5427 static void RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *PHI,
5428                                               Value *SelectValue,
5429                                               IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5430                                               DomTreeUpdater *DTU) {
5431   std::vector<DominatorTree::UpdateType> Updates;
5432 
5433   BasicBlock *SelectBB = SI->getParent();
5434   BasicBlock *DestBB = PHI->getParent();
5435 
5436   if (DTU && !is_contained(predecessors(DestBB), SelectBB))
5437     Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, SelectBB, DestBB});
5438   Builder.CreateBr(DestBB);
5439 
5440   // Remove the switch.
5441 
5442   while (PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(SelectBB) >= 0)
5443     PHI->removeIncomingValue(SelectBB);
5444   PHI->addIncoming(SelectValue, SelectBB);
5445 
5446   SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 4> RemovedSuccessors;
5447   for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
5448     BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
5449 
5450     if (Succ == DestBB)
5451       continue;
5452     Succ->removePredecessor(SelectBB);
5453     if (DTU && RemovedSuccessors.insert(Succ).second)
5454       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, SelectBB, Succ});
5455   }
5456   SI->eraseFromParent();
5457   if (DTU)
5458     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
5459 }
5460 
5461 /// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more
5462 /// phi nodes in a common successor block with only two different
5463 /// constant values, replace the switch with select.
5464 static bool switchToSelect(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5465                            DomTreeUpdater *DTU, const DataLayout &DL,
5466                            const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
5467   Value *const Cond = SI->getCondition();
5468   PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
5469   BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
5470   Constant *DefaultResult;
5471   SwitchCaseResultVectorTy UniqueResults;
5472   // Collect all the cases that will deliver the same value from the switch.
5473   if (!InitializeUniqueCases(SI, PHI, CommonDest, UniqueResults, DefaultResult,
5474                              DL, TTI, /*MaxUniqueResults*/2,
5475                              /*MaxCasesPerResult*/2))
5476     return false;
5477   assert(PHI != nullptr && "PHI for value select not found");
5478 
5479   Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
5480   Value *SelectValue =
5481       ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(UniqueResults, DefaultResult, Cond, Builder);
5482   if (SelectValue) {
5483     RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SI, PHI, SelectValue, Builder, DTU);
5484     return true;
5485   }
5486   // The switch couldn't be converted into a select.
5487   return false;
5488 }
5489 
5490 namespace {
5491 
5492 /// This class represents a lookup table that can be used to replace a switch.
5493 class SwitchLookupTable {
5494 public:
5495   /// Create a lookup table to use as a switch replacement with the contents
5496   /// of Values, using DefaultValue to fill any holes in the table.
5497   SwitchLookupTable(
5498       Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
5499       const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
5500       Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL, const StringRef &FuncName);
5501 
5502   /// Build instructions with Builder to retrieve the value at
5503   /// the position given by Index in the lookup table.
5504   Value *BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
5505 
5506   /// Return true if a table with TableSize elements of
5507   /// type ElementType would fit in a target-legal register.
5508   static bool WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL, uint64_t TableSize,
5509                                  Type *ElementType);
5510 
5511 private:
5512   // Depending on the contents of the table, it can be represented in
5513   // different ways.
5514   enum {
5515     // For tables where each element contains the same value, we just have to
5516     // store that single value and return it for each lookup.
5517     SingleValueKind,
5518 
5519     // For tables where there is a linear relationship between table index
5520     // and values. We calculate the result with a simple multiplication
5521     // and addition instead of a table lookup.
5522     LinearMapKind,
5523 
5524     // For small tables with integer elements, we can pack them into a bitmap
5525     // that fits into a target-legal register. Values are retrieved by
5526     // shift and mask operations.
5527     BitMapKind,
5528 
5529     // The table is stored as an array of values. Values are retrieved by load
5530     // instructions from the table.
5531     ArrayKind
5532   } Kind;
5533 
5534   // For SingleValueKind, this is the single value.
5535   Constant *SingleValue = nullptr;
5536 
5537   // For BitMapKind, this is the bitmap.
5538   ConstantInt *BitMap = nullptr;
5539   IntegerType *BitMapElementTy = nullptr;
5540 
5541   // For LinearMapKind, these are the constants used to derive the value.
5542   ConstantInt *LinearOffset = nullptr;
5543   ConstantInt *LinearMultiplier = nullptr;
5544 
5545   // For ArrayKind, this is the array.
5546   GlobalVariable *Array = nullptr;
5547 };
5548 
5549 } // end anonymous namespace
5550 
5551 SwitchLookupTable::SwitchLookupTable(
5552     Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
5553     const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
5554     Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL, const StringRef &FuncName) {
5555   assert(Values.size() && "Can't build lookup table without values!");
5556   assert(TableSize >= Values.size() && "Can't fit values in table!");
5557 
5558   // If all values in the table are equal, this is that value.
5559   SingleValue = Values.begin()->second;
5560 
5561   Type *ValueType = Values.begin()->second->getType();
5562 
5563   // Build up the table contents.
5564   SmallVector<Constant *, 64> TableContents(TableSize);
5565   for (size_t I = 0, E = Values.size(); I != E; ++I) {
5566     ConstantInt *CaseVal = Values[I].first;
5567     Constant *CaseRes = Values[I].second;
5568     assert(CaseRes->getType() == ValueType);
5569 
5570     uint64_t Idx = (CaseVal->getValue() - Offset->getValue()).getLimitedValue();
5571     TableContents[Idx] = CaseRes;
5572 
5573     if (CaseRes != SingleValue)
5574       SingleValue = nullptr;
5575   }
5576 
5577   // Fill in any holes in the table with the default result.
5578   if (Values.size() < TableSize) {
5579     assert(DefaultValue &&
5580            "Need a default value to fill the lookup table holes.");
5581     assert(DefaultValue->getType() == ValueType);
5582     for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
5583       if (!TableContents[I])
5584         TableContents[I] = DefaultValue;
5585     }
5586 
5587     if (DefaultValue != SingleValue)
5588       SingleValue = nullptr;
5589   }
5590 
5591   // If each element in the table contains the same value, we only need to store
5592   // that single value.
5593   if (SingleValue) {
5594     Kind = SingleValueKind;
5595     return;
5596   }
5597 
5598   // Check if we can derive the value with a linear transformation from the
5599   // table index.
5600   if (isa<IntegerType>(ValueType)) {
5601     bool LinearMappingPossible = true;
5602     APInt PrevVal;
5603     APInt DistToPrev;
5604     assert(TableSize >= 2 && "Should be a SingleValue table.");
5605     // Check if there is the same distance between two consecutive values.
5606     for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
5607       ConstantInt *ConstVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I]);
5608       if (!ConstVal) {
5609         // This is an undef. We could deal with it, but undefs in lookup tables
5610         // are very seldom. It's probably not worth the additional complexity.
5611         LinearMappingPossible = false;
5612         break;
5613       }
5614       const APInt &Val = ConstVal->getValue();
5615       if (I != 0) {
5616         APInt Dist = Val - PrevVal;
5617         if (I == 1) {
5618           DistToPrev = Dist;
5619         } else if (Dist != DistToPrev) {
5620           LinearMappingPossible = false;
5621           break;
5622         }
5623       }
5624       PrevVal = Val;
5625     }
5626     if (LinearMappingPossible) {
5627       LinearOffset = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[0]);
5628       LinearMultiplier = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), DistToPrev);
5629       Kind = LinearMapKind;
5630       ++NumLinearMaps;
5631       return;
5632     }
5633   }
5634 
5635   // If the type is integer and the table fits in a register, build a bitmap.
5636   if (WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, ValueType)) {
5637     IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(ValueType);
5638     APInt TableInt(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth(), 0);
5639     for (uint64_t I = TableSize; I > 0; --I) {
5640       TableInt <<= IT->getBitWidth();
5641       // Insert values into the bitmap. Undef values are set to zero.
5642       if (!isa<UndefValue>(TableContents[I - 1])) {
5643         ConstantInt *Val = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I - 1]);
5644         TableInt |= Val->getValue().zext(TableInt.getBitWidth());
5645       }
5646     }
5647     BitMap = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), TableInt);
5648     BitMapElementTy = IT;
5649     Kind = BitMapKind;
5650     ++NumBitMaps;
5651     return;
5652   }
5653 
5654   // Store the table in an array.
5655   ArrayType *ArrayTy = ArrayType::get(ValueType, TableSize);
5656   Constant *Initializer = ConstantArray::get(ArrayTy, TableContents);
5657 
5658   Array = new GlobalVariable(M, ArrayTy, /*isConstant=*/true,
5659                              GlobalVariable::PrivateLinkage, Initializer,
5660                              "switch.table." + FuncName);
5661   Array->setUnnamedAddr(GlobalValue::UnnamedAddr::Global);
5662   // Set the alignment to that of an array items. We will be only loading one
5663   // value out of it.
5664   Array->setAlignment(Align(DL.getPrefTypeAlignment(ValueType)));
5665   Kind = ArrayKind;
5666 }
5667 
5668 Value *SwitchLookupTable::BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
5669   switch (Kind) {
5670   case SingleValueKind:
5671     return SingleValue;
5672   case LinearMapKind: {
5673     // Derive the result value from the input value.
5674     Value *Result = Builder.CreateIntCast(Index, LinearMultiplier->getType(),
5675                                           false, "switch.idx.cast");
5676     if (!LinearMultiplier->isOne())
5677       Result = Builder.CreateMul(Result, LinearMultiplier, "switch.idx.mult");
5678     if (!LinearOffset->isZero())
5679       Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, LinearOffset, "switch.offset");
5680     return Result;
5681   }
5682   case BitMapKind: {
5683     // Type of the bitmap (e.g. i59).
5684     IntegerType *MapTy = BitMap->getType();
5685 
5686     // Cast Index to the same type as the bitmap.
5687     // Note: The Index is <= the number of elements in the table, so
5688     // truncating it to the width of the bitmask is safe.
5689     Value *ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(Index, MapTy, "switch.cast");
5690 
5691     // Multiply the shift amount by the element width.
5692     ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateMul(
5693         ShiftAmt, ConstantInt::get(MapTy, BitMapElementTy->getBitWidth()),
5694         "switch.shiftamt");
5695 
5696     // Shift down.
5697     Value *DownShifted =
5698         Builder.CreateLShr(BitMap, ShiftAmt, "switch.downshift");
5699     // Mask off.
5700     return Builder.CreateTrunc(DownShifted, BitMapElementTy, "switch.masked");
5701   }
5702   case ArrayKind: {
5703     // Make sure the table index will not overflow when treated as signed.
5704     IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(Index->getType());
5705     uint64_t TableSize =
5706         Array->getInitializer()->getType()->getArrayNumElements();
5707     if (TableSize > (1ULL << (IT->getBitWidth() - 1)))
5708       Index = Builder.CreateZExt(
5709           Index, IntegerType::get(IT->getContext(), IT->getBitWidth() + 1),
5710           "switch.tableidx.zext");
5711 
5712     Value *GEPIndices[] = {Builder.getInt32(0), Index};
5713     Value *GEP = Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(Array->getValueType(), Array,
5714                                            GEPIndices, "switch.gep");
5715     return Builder.CreateLoad(
5716         cast<ArrayType>(Array->getValueType())->getElementType(), GEP,
5717         "switch.load");
5718   }
5719   }
5720   llvm_unreachable("Unknown lookup table kind!");
5721 }
5722 
5723 bool SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL,
5724                                            uint64_t TableSize,
5725                                            Type *ElementType) {
5726   auto *IT = dyn_cast<IntegerType>(ElementType);
5727   if (!IT)
5728     return false;
5729   // FIXME: If the type is wider than it needs to be, e.g. i8 but all values
5730   // are <= 15, we could try to narrow the type.
5731 
5732   // Avoid overflow, fitsInLegalInteger uses unsigned int for the width.
5733   if (TableSize >= UINT_MAX / IT->getBitWidth())
5734     return false;
5735   return DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth());
5736 }
5737 
5738 /// Determine whether a lookup table should be built for this switch, based on
5739 /// the number of cases, size of the table, and the types of the results.
5740 static bool
5741 ShouldBuildLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, uint64_t TableSize,
5742                        const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
5743                        const SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> &ResultTypes) {
5744   if (SI->getNumCases() > TableSize || TableSize >= UINT64_MAX / 10)
5745     return false; // TableSize overflowed, or mul below might overflow.
5746 
5747   bool AllTablesFitInRegister = true;
5748   bool HasIllegalType = false;
5749   for (const auto &I : ResultTypes) {
5750     Type *Ty = I.second;
5751 
5752     // Saturate this flag to true.
5753     HasIllegalType = HasIllegalType || !TTI.isTypeLegal(Ty);
5754 
5755     // Saturate this flag to false.
5756     AllTablesFitInRegister =
5757         AllTablesFitInRegister &&
5758         SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, Ty);
5759 
5760     // If both flags saturate, we're done. NOTE: This *only* works with
5761     // saturating flags, and all flags have to saturate first due to the
5762     // non-deterministic behavior of iterating over a dense map.
5763     if (HasIllegalType && !AllTablesFitInRegister)
5764       break;
5765   }
5766 
5767   // If each table would fit in a register, we should build it anyway.
5768   if (AllTablesFitInRegister)
5769     return true;
5770 
5771   // Don't build a table that doesn't fit in-register if it has illegal types.
5772   if (HasIllegalType)
5773     return false;
5774 
5775   // The table density should be at least 40%. This is the same criterion as for
5776   // jump tables, see SelectionDAGBuilder::handleJTSwitchCase.
5777   // FIXME: Find the best cut-off.
5778   return SI->getNumCases() * 10 >= TableSize * 4;
5779 }
5780 
5781 /// Try to reuse the switch table index compare. Following pattern:
5782 /// \code
5783 ///     if (idx < tablesize)
5784 ///        r = table[idx]; // table does not contain default_value
5785 ///     else
5786 ///        r = default_value;
5787 ///     if (r != default_value)
5788 ///        ...
5789 /// \endcode
5790 /// Is optimized to:
5791 /// \code
5792 ///     cond = idx < tablesize;
5793 ///     if (cond)
5794 ///        r = table[idx];
5795 ///     else
5796 ///        r = default_value;
5797 ///     if (cond)
5798 ///        ...
5799 /// \endcode
5800 /// Jump threading will then eliminate the second if(cond).
5801 static void reuseTableCompare(
5802     User *PhiUser, BasicBlock *PhiBlock, BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch,
5803     Constant *DefaultValue,
5804     const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values) {
5805   ICmpInst *CmpInst = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(PhiUser);
5806   if (!CmpInst)
5807     return;
5808 
5809   // We require that the compare is in the same block as the phi so that jump
5810   // threading can do its work afterwards.
5811   if (CmpInst->getParent() != PhiBlock)
5812     return;
5813 
5814   Constant *CmpOp1 = dyn_cast<Constant>(CmpInst->getOperand(1));
5815   if (!CmpOp1)
5816     return;
5817 
5818   Value *RangeCmp = RangeCheckBranch->getCondition();
5819   Constant *TrueConst = ConstantInt::getTrue(RangeCmp->getType());
5820   Constant *FalseConst = ConstantInt::getFalse(RangeCmp->getType());
5821 
5822   // Check if the compare with the default value is constant true or false.
5823   Constant *DefaultConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
5824                                                  DefaultValue, CmpOp1, true);
5825   if (DefaultConst != TrueConst && DefaultConst != FalseConst)
5826     return;
5827 
5828   // Check if the compare with the case values is distinct from the default
5829   // compare result.
5830   for (auto ValuePair : Values) {
5831     Constant *CaseConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
5832                                                 ValuePair.second, CmpOp1, true);
5833     if (!CaseConst || CaseConst == DefaultConst || isa<UndefValue>(CaseConst))
5834       return;
5835     assert((CaseConst == TrueConst || CaseConst == FalseConst) &&
5836            "Expect true or false as compare result.");
5837   }
5838 
5839   // Check if the branch instruction dominates the phi node. It's a simple
5840   // dominance check, but sufficient for our needs.
5841   // Although this check is invariant in the calling loops, it's better to do it
5842   // at this late stage. Practically we do it at most once for a switch.
5843   BasicBlock *BranchBlock = RangeCheckBranch->getParent();
5844   for (BasicBlock *Pred : predecessors(PhiBlock)) {
5845     if (Pred != BranchBlock && Pred->getUniquePredecessor() != BranchBlock)
5846       return;
5847   }
5848 
5849   if (DefaultConst == FalseConst) {
5850     // The compare yields the same result. We can replace it.
5851     CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(RangeCmp);
5852     ++NumTableCmpReuses;
5853   } else {
5854     // The compare yields the same result, just inverted. We can replace it.
5855     Value *InvertedTableCmp = BinaryOperator::CreateXor(
5856         RangeCmp, ConstantInt::get(RangeCmp->getType(), 1), "inverted.cmp",
5857         RangeCheckBranch);
5858     CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(InvertedTableCmp);
5859     ++NumTableCmpReuses;
5860   }
5861 }
5862 
5863 /// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more phi nodes in a common
5864 /// successor block with different constant values, replace the switch with
5865 /// lookup tables.
5866 static bool SwitchToLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5867                                 DomTreeUpdater *DTU, const DataLayout &DL,
5868                                 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
5869   assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
5870 
5871   BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent();
5872   Function *Fn = BB->getParent();
5873   // Only build lookup table when we have a target that supports it or the
5874   // attribute is not set.
5875   if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTables() ||
5876       (Fn->getFnAttribute("no-jump-tables").getValueAsBool()))
5877     return false;
5878 
5879   // FIXME: If the switch is too sparse for a lookup table, perhaps we could
5880   // split off a dense part and build a lookup table for that.
5881 
5882   // FIXME: This creates arrays of GEPs to constant strings, which means each
5883   // GEP needs a runtime relocation in PIC code. We should just build one big
5884   // string and lookup indices into that.
5885 
5886   // Ignore switches with less than three cases. Lookup tables will not make
5887   // them faster, so we don't analyze them.
5888   if (SI->getNumCases() < 3)
5889     return false;
5890 
5891   // Figure out the corresponding result for each case value and phi node in the
5892   // common destination, as well as the min and max case values.
5893   assert(!SI->cases().empty());
5894   SwitchInst::CaseIt CI = SI->case_begin();
5895   ConstantInt *MinCaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
5896   ConstantInt *MaxCaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
5897 
5898   BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
5899 
5900   using ResultListTy = SmallVector<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>, 4>;
5901   SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, ResultListTy> ResultLists;
5902 
5903   SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Constant *> DefaultResults;
5904   SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> ResultTypes;
5905   SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
5906 
5907   for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); CI != E; ++CI) {
5908     ConstantInt *CaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
5909     if (CaseVal->getValue().slt(MinCaseVal->getValue()))
5910       MinCaseVal = CaseVal;
5911     if (CaseVal->getValue().sgt(MaxCaseVal->getValue()))
5912       MaxCaseVal = CaseVal;
5913 
5914     // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
5915     using ResultsTy = SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4>;
5916     ResultsTy Results;
5917     if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, CI->getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest,
5918                         Results, DL, TTI))
5919       return false;
5920 
5921     // Append the result from this case to the list for each phi.
5922     for (const auto &I : Results) {
5923       PHINode *PHI = I.first;
5924       Constant *Value = I.second;
5925       if (!ResultLists.count(PHI))
5926         PHIs.push_back(PHI);
5927       ResultLists[PHI].push_back(std::make_pair(CaseVal, Value));
5928     }
5929   }
5930 
5931   // Keep track of the result types.
5932   for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
5933     ResultTypes[PHI] = ResultLists[PHI][0].second->getType();
5934   }
5935 
5936   uint64_t NumResults = ResultLists[PHIs[0]].size();
5937   APInt RangeSpread = MaxCaseVal->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue();
5938   uint64_t TableSize = RangeSpread.getLimitedValue() + 1;
5939   bool TableHasHoles = (NumResults < TableSize);
5940 
5941   // If the table has holes, we need a constant result for the default case
5942   // or a bitmask that fits in a register.
5943   SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> DefaultResultsList;
5944   bool HasDefaultResults =
5945       GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest,
5946                      DefaultResultsList, DL, TTI);
5947 
5948   bool NeedMask = (TableHasHoles && !HasDefaultResults);
5949   if (NeedMask) {
5950     // As an extra penalty for the validity test we require more cases.
5951     if (SI->getNumCases() < 4) // FIXME: Find best threshold value (benchmark).
5952       return false;
5953     if (!DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize))
5954       return false;
5955   }
5956 
5957   for (const auto &I : DefaultResultsList) {
5958     PHINode *PHI = I.first;
5959     Constant *Result = I.second;
5960     DefaultResults[PHI] = Result;
5961   }
5962 
5963   if (!ShouldBuildLookupTable(SI, TableSize, TTI, DL, ResultTypes))
5964     return false;
5965 
5966   std::vector<DominatorTree::UpdateType> Updates;
5967 
5968   // Create the BB that does the lookups.
5969   Module &Mod = *CommonDest->getParent()->getParent();
5970   BasicBlock *LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(
5971       Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup", CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
5972 
5973   // Compute the table index value.
5974   Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
5975   Value *TableIndex;
5976   if (MinCaseVal->isNullValue())
5977     TableIndex = SI->getCondition();
5978   else
5979     TableIndex = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), MinCaseVal,
5980                                    "switch.tableidx");
5981 
5982   // Compute the maximum table size representable by the integer type we are
5983   // switching upon.
5984   unsigned CaseSize = MinCaseVal->getType()->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
5985   uint64_t MaxTableSize = CaseSize > 63 ? UINT64_MAX : 1ULL << CaseSize;
5986   assert(MaxTableSize >= TableSize &&
5987          "It is impossible for a switch to have more entries than the max "
5988          "representable value of its input integer type's size.");
5989 
5990   // If the default destination is unreachable, or if the lookup table covers
5991   // all values of the conditional variable, branch directly to the lookup table
5992   // BB. Otherwise, check that the condition is within the case range.
5993   const bool DefaultIsReachable =
5994       !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
5995   const bool GeneratingCoveredLookupTable = (MaxTableSize == TableSize);
5996   BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch = nullptr;
5997 
5998   if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
5999     Builder.CreateBr(LookupBB);
6000     if (DTU)
6001       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, BB, LookupBB});
6002     // Note: We call removeProdecessor later since we need to be able to get the
6003     // PHI value for the default case in case we're using a bit mask.
6004   } else {
6005     Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(
6006         TableIndex, ConstantInt::get(MinCaseVal->getType(), TableSize));
6007     RangeCheckBranch =
6008         Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
6009     if (DTU)
6010       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, BB, LookupBB});
6011   }
6012 
6013   // Populate the BB that does the lookups.
6014   Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
6015 
6016   if (NeedMask) {
6017     // Before doing the lookup, we do the hole check. The LookupBB is therefore
6018     // re-purposed to do the hole check, and we create a new LookupBB.
6019     BasicBlock *MaskBB = LookupBB;
6020     MaskBB->setName("switch.hole_check");
6021     LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup",
6022                                   CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
6023 
6024     // Make the mask's bitwidth at least 8-bit and a power-of-2 to avoid
6025     // unnecessary illegal types.
6026     uint64_t TableSizePowOf2 = NextPowerOf2(std::max(7ULL, TableSize - 1ULL));
6027     APInt MaskInt(TableSizePowOf2, 0);
6028     APInt One(TableSizePowOf2, 1);
6029     // Build bitmask; fill in a 1 bit for every case.
6030     const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHIs[0]];
6031     for (size_t I = 0, E = ResultList.size(); I != E; ++I) {
6032       uint64_t Idx = (ResultList[I].first->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue())
6033                          .getLimitedValue();
6034       MaskInt |= One << Idx;
6035     }
6036     ConstantInt *TableMask = ConstantInt::get(Mod.getContext(), MaskInt);
6037 
6038     // Get the TableIndex'th bit of the bitmask.
6039     // If this bit is 0 (meaning hole) jump to the default destination,
6040     // else continue with table lookup.
6041     IntegerType *MapTy = TableMask->getType();
6042     Value *MaskIndex =
6043         Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(TableIndex, MapTy, "switch.maskindex");
6044     Value *Shifted = Builder.CreateLShr(TableMask, MaskIndex, "switch.shifted");
6045     Value *LoBit = Builder.CreateTrunc(
6046         Shifted, Type::getInt1Ty(Mod.getContext()), "switch.lobit");
6047     Builder.CreateCondBr(LoBit, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
6048     if (DTU) {
6049       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, MaskBB, LookupBB});
6050       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, MaskBB, SI->getDefaultDest()});
6051     }
6052     Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
6053     AddPredecessorToBlock(SI->getDefaultDest(), MaskBB, BB);
6054   }
6055 
6056   if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
6057     // We cached PHINodes in PHIs. To avoid accessing deleted PHINodes later,
6058     // do not delete PHINodes here.
6059     SI->getDefaultDest()->removePredecessor(BB,
6060                                             /*KeepOneInputPHIs=*/true);
6061     if (DTU)
6062       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, BB, SI->getDefaultDest()});
6063   }
6064 
6065   bool ReturnedEarly = false;
6066   for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
6067     const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHI];
6068 
6069     // If using a bitmask, use any value to fill the lookup table holes.
6070     Constant *DV = NeedMask ? ResultLists[PHI][0].second : DefaultResults[PHI];
6071     StringRef FuncName = Fn->getName();
6072     SwitchLookupTable Table(Mod, TableSize, MinCaseVal, ResultList, DV, DL,
6073                             FuncName);
6074 
6075     Value *Result = Table.BuildLookup(TableIndex, Builder);
6076 
6077     // If the result is used to return immediately from the function, we want to
6078     // do that right here.
6079     if (PHI->hasOneUse() && isa<ReturnInst>(*PHI->user_begin()) &&
6080         PHI->user_back() == CommonDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()) {
6081       Builder.CreateRet(Result);
6082       ReturnedEarly = true;
6083       break;
6084     }
6085 
6086     // Do a small peephole optimization: re-use the switch table compare if
6087     // possible.
6088     if (!TableHasHoles && HasDefaultResults && RangeCheckBranch) {
6089       BasicBlock *PhiBlock = PHI->getParent();
6090       // Search for compare instructions which use the phi.
6091       for (auto *User : PHI->users()) {
6092         reuseTableCompare(User, PhiBlock, RangeCheckBranch, DV, ResultList);
6093       }
6094     }
6095 
6096     PHI->addIncoming(Result, LookupBB);
6097   }
6098 
6099   if (!ReturnedEarly) {
6100     Builder.CreateBr(CommonDest);
6101     if (DTU)
6102       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, LookupBB, CommonDest});
6103   }
6104 
6105   // Remove the switch.
6106   SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 8> RemovedSuccessors;
6107   for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
6108     BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
6109 
6110     if (Succ == SI->getDefaultDest())
6111       continue;
6112     Succ->removePredecessor(BB);
6113     RemovedSuccessors.insert(Succ);
6114   }
6115   SI->eraseFromParent();
6116 
6117   if (DTU) {
6118     for (BasicBlock *RemovedSuccessor : RemovedSuccessors)
6119       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, BB, RemovedSuccessor});
6120     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
6121   }
6122 
6123   ++NumLookupTables;
6124   if (NeedMask)
6125     ++NumLookupTablesHoles;
6126   return true;
6127 }
6128 
6129 static bool isSwitchDense(ArrayRef<int64_t> Values) {
6130   // See also SelectionDAGBuilder::isDense(), which this function was based on.
6131   uint64_t Diff = (uint64_t)Values.back() - (uint64_t)Values.front();
6132   uint64_t Range = Diff + 1;
6133   uint64_t NumCases = Values.size();
6134   // 40% is the default density for building a jump table in optsize/minsize mode.
6135   uint64_t MinDensity = 40;
6136 
6137   return NumCases * 100 >= Range * MinDensity;
6138 }
6139 
6140 /// Try to transform a switch that has "holes" in it to a contiguous sequence
6141 /// of cases.
6142 ///
6143 /// A switch such as: switch(i) {case 5: case 9: case 13: case 17:} can be
6144 /// range-reduced to: switch ((i-5) / 4) {case 0: case 1: case 2: case 3:}.
6145 ///
6146 /// This converts a sparse switch into a dense switch which allows better
6147 /// lowering and could also allow transforming into a lookup table.
6148 static bool ReduceSwitchRange(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
6149                               const DataLayout &DL,
6150                               const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
6151   auto *CondTy = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
6152   if (CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth() > 64 ||
6153       !DL.fitsInLegalInteger(CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth()))
6154     return false;
6155   // Only bother with this optimization if there are more than 3 switch cases;
6156   // SDAG will only bother creating jump tables for 4 or more cases.
6157   if (SI->getNumCases() < 4)
6158     return false;
6159 
6160   // This transform is agnostic to the signedness of the input or case values. We
6161   // can treat the case values as signed or unsigned. We can optimize more common
6162   // cases such as a sequence crossing zero {-4,0,4,8} if we interpret case values
6163   // as signed.
6164   SmallVector<int64_t,4> Values;
6165   for (auto &C : SI->cases())
6166     Values.push_back(C.getCaseValue()->getValue().getSExtValue());
6167   llvm::sort(Values);
6168 
6169   // If the switch is already dense, there's nothing useful to do here.
6170   if (isSwitchDense(Values))
6171     return false;
6172 
6173   // First, transform the values such that they start at zero and ascend.
6174   int64_t Base = Values[0];
6175   for (auto &V : Values)
6176     V -= (uint64_t)(Base);
6177 
6178   // Now we have signed numbers that have been shifted so that, given enough
6179   // precision, there are no negative values. Since the rest of the transform
6180   // is bitwise only, we switch now to an unsigned representation.
6181 
6182   // This transform can be done speculatively because it is so cheap - it
6183   // results in a single rotate operation being inserted.
6184   // FIXME: It's possible that optimizing a switch on powers of two might also
6185   // be beneficial - flag values are often powers of two and we could use a CLZ
6186   // as the key function.
6187 
6188   // countTrailingZeros(0) returns 64. As Values is guaranteed to have more than
6189   // one element and LLVM disallows duplicate cases, Shift is guaranteed to be
6190   // less than 64.
6191   unsigned Shift = 64;
6192   for (auto &V : Values)
6193     Shift = std::min(Shift, countTrailingZeros((uint64_t)V));
6194   assert(Shift < 64);
6195   if (Shift > 0)
6196     for (auto &V : Values)
6197       V = (int64_t)((uint64_t)V >> Shift);
6198 
6199   if (!isSwitchDense(Values))
6200     // Transform didn't create a dense switch.
6201     return false;
6202 
6203   // The obvious transform is to shift the switch condition right and emit a
6204   // check that the condition actually cleanly divided by GCD, i.e.
6205   //   C & (1 << Shift - 1) == 0
6206   // inserting a new CFG edge to handle the case where it didn't divide cleanly.
6207   //
6208   // A cheaper way of doing this is a simple ROTR(C, Shift). This performs the
6209   // shift and puts the shifted-off bits in the uppermost bits. If any of these
6210   // are nonzero then the switch condition will be very large and will hit the
6211   // default case.
6212 
6213   auto *Ty = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
6214   Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
6215   auto *ShiftC = ConstantInt::get(Ty, Shift);
6216   auto *Sub = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), ConstantInt::get(Ty, Base));
6217   auto *LShr = Builder.CreateLShr(Sub, ShiftC);
6218   auto *Shl = Builder.CreateShl(Sub, Ty->getBitWidth() - Shift);
6219   auto *Rot = Builder.CreateOr(LShr, Shl);
6220   SI->replaceUsesOfWith(SI->getCondition(), Rot);
6221 
6222   for (auto Case : SI->cases()) {
6223     auto *Orig = Case.getCaseValue();
6224     auto Sub = Orig->getValue() - APInt(Ty->getBitWidth(), Base);
6225     Case.setValue(
6226         cast<ConstantInt>(ConstantInt::get(Ty, Sub.lshr(ShiftC->getValue()))));
6227   }
6228   return true;
6229 }
6230 
6231 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
6232   BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent();
6233 
6234   if (isValueEqualityComparison(SI)) {
6235     // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
6236     // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this switch.
6237     if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
6238       if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(SI, OnlyPred, Builder))
6239         return requestResimplify();
6240 
6241     Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
6242     if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(Cond))
6243       if (SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SI, Select))
6244         return requestResimplify();
6245 
6246     // If the block only contains the switch, see if we can fold the block
6247     // away into any preds.
6248     if (SI == &*BB->instructionsWithoutDebug().begin())
6249       if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(SI, Builder))
6250         return requestResimplify();
6251   }
6252 
6253   // Try to transform the switch into an icmp and a branch.
6254   if (TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SI, Builder))
6255     return requestResimplify();
6256 
6257   // Remove unreachable cases.
6258   if (eliminateDeadSwitchCases(SI, DTU, Options.AC, DL))
6259     return requestResimplify();
6260 
6261   if (switchToSelect(SI, Builder, DTU, DL, TTI))
6262     return requestResimplify();
6263 
6264   if (Options.ForwardSwitchCondToPhi && ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SI))
6265     return requestResimplify();
6266 
6267   // The conversion from switch to lookup tables results in difficult-to-analyze
6268   // code and makes pruning branches much harder. This is a problem if the
6269   // switch expression itself can still be restricted as a result of inlining or
6270   // CVP. Therefore, only apply this transformation during late stages of the
6271   // optimisation pipeline.
6272   if (Options.ConvertSwitchToLookupTable &&
6273       SwitchToLookupTable(SI, Builder, DTU, DL, TTI))
6274     return requestResimplify();
6275 
6276   if (ReduceSwitchRange(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
6277     return requestResimplify();
6278 
6279   return false;
6280 }
6281 
6282 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI) {
6283   BasicBlock *BB = IBI->getParent();
6284   bool Changed = false;
6285 
6286   // Eliminate redundant destinations.
6287   SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Succs;
6288   SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 8> RemovedSuccs;
6289   for (unsigned i = 0, e = IBI->getNumDestinations(); i != e; ++i) {
6290     BasicBlock *Dest = IBI->getDestination(i);
6291     if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken() || !Succs.insert(Dest).second) {
6292       if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken())
6293         RemovedSuccs.insert(Dest);
6294       Dest->removePredecessor(BB);
6295       IBI->removeDestination(i);
6296       --i;
6297       --e;
6298       Changed = true;
6299     }
6300   }
6301 
6302   if (DTU) {
6303     std::vector<DominatorTree::UpdateType> Updates;
6304     Updates.reserve(RemovedSuccs.size());
6305     for (auto *RemovedSucc : RemovedSuccs)
6306       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, BB, RemovedSucc});
6307     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
6308   }
6309 
6310   if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 0) {
6311     // If the indirectbr has no successors, change it to unreachable.
6312     new UnreachableInst(IBI->getContext(), IBI);
6313     EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(IBI);
6314     return true;
6315   }
6316 
6317   if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 1) {
6318     // If the indirectbr has one successor, change it to a direct branch.
6319     BranchInst::Create(IBI->getDestination(0), IBI);
6320     EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(IBI);
6321     return true;
6322   }
6323 
6324   if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(IBI->getAddress())) {
6325     if (SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IBI, SI))
6326       return requestResimplify();
6327   }
6328   return Changed;
6329 }
6330 
6331 /// Given an block with only a single landing pad and a unconditional branch
6332 /// try to find another basic block which this one can be merged with.  This
6333 /// handles cases where we have multiple invokes with unique landing pads, but
6334 /// a shared handler.
6335 ///
6336 /// We specifically choose to not worry about merging non-empty blocks
6337 /// here.  That is a PRE/scheduling problem and is best solved elsewhere.  In
6338 /// practice, the optimizer produces empty landing pad blocks quite frequently
6339 /// when dealing with exception dense code.  (see: instcombine, gvn, if-else
6340 /// sinking in this file)
6341 ///
6342 /// This is primarily a code size optimization.  We need to avoid performing
6343 /// any transform which might inhibit optimization (such as our ability to
6344 /// specialize a particular handler via tail commoning).  We do this by not
6345 /// merging any blocks which require us to introduce a phi.  Since the same
6346 /// values are flowing through both blocks, we don't lose any ability to
6347 /// specialize.  If anything, we make such specialization more likely.
6348 ///
6349 /// TODO - This transformation could remove entries from a phi in the target
6350 /// block when the inputs in the phi are the same for the two blocks being
6351 /// merged.  In some cases, this could result in removal of the PHI entirely.
6352 static bool TryToMergeLandingPad(LandingPadInst *LPad, BranchInst *BI,
6353                                  BasicBlock *BB, DomTreeUpdater *DTU) {
6354   auto Succ = BB->getUniqueSuccessor();
6355   assert(Succ);
6356   // If there's a phi in the successor block, we'd likely have to introduce
6357   // a phi into the merged landing pad block.
6358   if (isa<PHINode>(*Succ->begin()))
6359     return false;
6360 
6361   for (BasicBlock *OtherPred : predecessors(Succ)) {
6362     if (BB == OtherPred)
6363       continue;
6364     BasicBlock::iterator I = OtherPred->begin();
6365     LandingPadInst *LPad2 = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I);
6366     if (!LPad2 || !LPad2->isIdenticalTo(LPad))
6367       continue;
6368     for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
6369       ;
6370     BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(I);
6371     if (!BI2 || !BI2->isIdenticalTo(BI))
6372       continue;
6373 
6374     std::vector<DominatorTree::UpdateType> Updates;
6375 
6376     // We've found an identical block.  Update our predecessors to take that
6377     // path instead and make ourselves dead.
6378     SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
6379     for (BasicBlock *Pred : Preds) {
6380       InvokeInst *II = cast<InvokeInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
6381       assert(II->getNormalDest() != BB && II->getUnwindDest() == BB &&
6382              "unexpected successor");
6383       II->setUnwindDest(OtherPred);
6384       if (DTU) {
6385         Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, Pred, OtherPred});
6386         Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, Pred, BB});
6387       }
6388     }
6389 
6390     // The debug info in OtherPred doesn't cover the merged control flow that
6391     // used to go through BB.  We need to delete it or update it.
6392     for (auto I = OtherPred->begin(), E = OtherPred->end(); I != E;) {
6393       Instruction &Inst = *I;
6394       I++;
6395       if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst))
6396         Inst.eraseFromParent();
6397     }
6398 
6399     SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Succs(succ_begin(BB), succ_end(BB));
6400     for (BasicBlock *Succ : Succs) {
6401       Succ->removePredecessor(BB);
6402       if (DTU)
6403         Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, BB, Succ});
6404     }
6405 
6406     IRBuilder<> Builder(BI);
6407     Builder.CreateUnreachable();
6408     BI->eraseFromParent();
6409     if (DTU)
6410       DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
6411     return true;
6412   }
6413   return false;
6414 }
6415 
6416 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifyBranch(BranchInst *Branch, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
6417   return Branch->isUnconditional() ? simplifyUncondBranch(Branch, Builder)
6418                                    : simplifyCondBranch(Branch, Builder);
6419 }
6420 
6421 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI,
6422                                           IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
6423   BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
6424   BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(0);
6425 
6426   // If the Terminator is the only non-phi instruction, simplify the block.
6427   // If LoopHeader is provided, check if the block or its successor is a loop
6428   // header. (This is for early invocations before loop simplify and
6429   // vectorization to keep canonical loop forms for nested loops. These blocks
6430   // can be eliminated when the pass is invoked later in the back-end.)
6431   // Note that if BB has only one predecessor then we do not introduce new
6432   // backedge, so we can eliminate BB.
6433   bool NeedCanonicalLoop =
6434       Options.NeedCanonicalLoop &&
6435       (!LoopHeaders.empty() && BB->hasNPredecessorsOrMore(2) &&
6436        (is_contained(LoopHeaders, BB) || is_contained(LoopHeaders, Succ)));
6437   BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg(true)->getIterator();
6438   if (I->isTerminator() && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock() &&
6439       !NeedCanonicalLoop && TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock(BB, DTU))
6440     return true;
6441 
6442   // If the only instruction in the block is a seteq/setne comparison against a
6443   // constant, try to simplify the block.
6444   if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I))
6445     if (ICI->isEquality() && isa<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1))) {
6446       for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
6447         ;
6448       if (I->isTerminator() &&
6449           tryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICI, Builder))
6450         return true;
6451     }
6452 
6453   // See if we can merge an empty landing pad block with another which is
6454   // equivalent.
6455   if (LandingPadInst *LPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I)) {
6456     for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
6457       ;
6458     if (I->isTerminator() && TryToMergeLandingPad(LPad, BI, BB, DTU))
6459       return true;
6460   }
6461 
6462   // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
6463   // branches to us and our successor, fold the comparison into the
6464   // predecessor and use logical operations to update the incoming value
6465   // for PHI nodes in common successor.
6466   if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, DTU, /*MSSAU=*/nullptr, &TTI,
6467                              Options.BonusInstThreshold))
6468     return requestResimplify();
6469   return false;
6470 }
6471 
6472 static BasicBlock *allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BasicBlock *BB) {
6473   BasicBlock *PredPred = nullptr;
6474   for (auto *P : predecessors(BB)) {
6475     BasicBlock *PPred = P->getSinglePredecessor();
6476     if (!PPred || (PredPred && PredPred != PPred))
6477       return nullptr;
6478     PredPred = PPred;
6479   }
6480   return PredPred;
6481 }
6482 
6483 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
6484   BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
6485   if (!Options.SimplifyCondBranch)
6486     return false;
6487 
6488   // Conditional branch
6489   if (isValueEqualityComparison(BI)) {
6490     // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
6491     // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this
6492     // switch.
6493     if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
6494       if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(BI, OnlyPred, Builder))
6495         return requestResimplify();
6496 
6497     // This block must be empty, except for the setcond inst, if it exists.
6498     // Ignore dbg and pseudo intrinsics.
6499     auto I = BB->instructionsWithoutDebug(true).begin();
6500     if (&*I == BI) {
6501       if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
6502         return requestResimplify();
6503     } else if (&*I == cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition())) {
6504       ++I;
6505       if (&*I == BI && FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
6506         return requestResimplify();
6507     }
6508   }
6509 
6510   // Try to turn "br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F" into a switch instruction.
6511   if (SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BI, Builder, DL))
6512     return true;
6513 
6514   // If this basic block has dominating predecessor blocks and the dominating
6515   // blocks' conditions imply BI's condition, we know the direction of BI.
6516   Optional<bool> Imp = isImpliedByDomCondition(BI->getCondition(), BI, DL);
6517   if (Imp) {
6518     // Turn this into a branch on constant.
6519     auto *OldCond = BI->getCondition();
6520     ConstantInt *TorF = *Imp ? ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext())
6521                              : ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
6522     BI->setCondition(TorF);
6523     RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(OldCond);
6524     return requestResimplify();
6525   }
6526 
6527   // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
6528   // branches to us and one of our successors, fold the comparison into the
6529   // predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination.
6530   if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, DTU, /*MSSAU=*/nullptr, &TTI,
6531                              Options.BonusInstThreshold))
6532     return requestResimplify();
6533 
6534   // We have a conditional branch to two blocks that are only reachable
6535   // from BI.  We know that the condbr dominates the two blocks, so see if
6536   // there is any identical code in the "then" and "else" blocks.  If so, we
6537   // can hoist it up to the branching block.
6538   if (BI->getSuccessor(0)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
6539     if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
6540       if (HoistCommon &&
6541           HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BI, TTI, !Options.HoistCommonInsts))
6542         return requestResimplify();
6543     } else {
6544       // If Successor #1 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
6545       // execute Successor #0 if it branches to Successor #1.
6546       Instruction *Succ0TI = BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator();
6547       if (Succ0TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
6548           Succ0TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
6549         if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(0), TTI))
6550           return requestResimplify();
6551     }
6552   } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
6553     // If Successor #0 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
6554     // execute Successor #1 if it branches to Successor #0.
6555     Instruction *Succ1TI = BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator();
6556     if (Succ1TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
6557         Succ1TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
6558       if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(1), TTI))
6559         return requestResimplify();
6560   }
6561 
6562   // If this is a branch on a phi node in the current block, thread control
6563   // through this block if any PHI node entries are constants.
6564   if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition()))
6565     if (PN->getParent() == BI->getParent())
6566       if (FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DTU, DL, Options.AC))
6567         return requestResimplify();
6568 
6569   // Scan predecessor blocks for conditional branches.
6570   for (BasicBlock *Pred : predecessors(BB))
6571     if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(Pred->getTerminator()))
6572       if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
6573         if (SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI, DTU, DL, TTI))
6574           return requestResimplify();
6575 
6576   // Look for diamond patterns.
6577   if (MergeCondStores)
6578     if (BasicBlock *PrevBB = allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BB))
6579       if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PrevBB->getTerminator()))
6580         if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
6581           if (mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI, DTU, DL, TTI))
6582             return requestResimplify();
6583 
6584   return false;
6585 }
6586 
6587 /// Check if passing a value to an instruction will cause undefined behavior.
6588 static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I, bool PtrValueMayBeModified) {
6589   Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V);
6590   if (!C)
6591     return false;
6592 
6593   if (I->use_empty())
6594     return false;
6595 
6596   if (C->isNullValue() || isa<UndefValue>(C)) {
6597     // Only look at the first use, avoid hurting compile time with long uselists
6598     User *Use = *I->user_begin();
6599 
6600     // Now make sure that there are no instructions in between that can alter
6601     // control flow (eg. calls)
6602     for (BasicBlock::iterator
6603              i = ++BasicBlock::iterator(I),
6604              UI = BasicBlock::iterator(dyn_cast<Instruction>(Use));
6605          i != UI; ++i) {
6606       if (i == I->getParent()->end())
6607         return false;
6608       if (!isGuaranteedToTransferExecutionToSuccessor(&*i))
6609         return false;
6610     }
6611 
6612     // Look through GEPs. A load from a GEP derived from NULL is still undefined
6613     if (GetElementPtrInst *GEP = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Use))
6614       if (GEP->getPointerOperand() == I) {
6615         if (!GEP->isInBounds() || !GEP->hasAllZeroIndices())
6616           PtrValueMayBeModified = true;
6617         return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, GEP, PtrValueMayBeModified);
6618       }
6619 
6620     // Look through bitcasts.
6621     if (BitCastInst *BC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(Use))
6622       return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, BC, PtrValueMayBeModified);
6623 
6624     // Load from null is undefined.
6625     if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(Use))
6626       if (!LI->isVolatile())
6627         return !NullPointerIsDefined(LI->getFunction(),
6628                                      LI->getPointerAddressSpace());
6629 
6630     // Store to null is undefined.
6631     if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(Use))
6632       if (!SI->isVolatile())
6633         return (!NullPointerIsDefined(SI->getFunction(),
6634                                       SI->getPointerAddressSpace())) &&
6635                SI->getPointerOperand() == I;
6636 
6637     if (auto *CB = dyn_cast<CallBase>(Use)) {
6638       if (C->isNullValue() && NullPointerIsDefined(CB->getFunction()))
6639         return false;
6640       // A call to null is undefined.
6641       if (CB->getCalledOperand() == I)
6642         return true;
6643 
6644       if (C->isNullValue()) {
6645         for (const llvm::Use &Arg : CB->args())
6646           if (Arg == I) {
6647             unsigned ArgIdx = CB->getArgOperandNo(&Arg);
6648             if (CB->isPassingUndefUB(ArgIdx) &&
6649                 CB->paramHasAttr(ArgIdx, Attribute::NonNull)) {
6650               // Passing null to a nonnnull+noundef argument is undefined.
6651               return !PtrValueMayBeModified;
6652             }
6653           }
6654       } else if (isa<UndefValue>(C)) {
6655         // Passing undef to a noundef argument is undefined.
6656         for (const llvm::Use &Arg : CB->args())
6657           if (Arg == I) {
6658             unsigned ArgIdx = CB->getArgOperandNo(&Arg);
6659             if (CB->isPassingUndefUB(ArgIdx)) {
6660               // Passing undef to a noundef argument is undefined.
6661               return true;
6662             }
6663           }
6664       }
6665     }
6666   }
6667   return false;
6668 }
6669 
6670 /// If BB has an incoming value that will always trigger undefined behavior
6671 /// (eg. null pointer dereference), remove the branch leading here.
6672 static bool removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BasicBlock *BB,
6673                                               DomTreeUpdater *DTU) {
6674   for (PHINode &PHI : BB->phis())
6675     for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHI.getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
6676       if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(PHI.getIncomingValue(i), &PHI)) {
6677         BasicBlock *Predecessor = PHI.getIncomingBlock(i);
6678         Instruction *T = Predecessor->getTerminator();
6679         IRBuilder<> Builder(T);
6680         if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(T)) {
6681           BB->removePredecessor(Predecessor);
6682           // Turn uncoditional branches into unreachables and remove the dead
6683           // destination from conditional branches.
6684           if (BI->isUnconditional())
6685             Builder.CreateUnreachable();
6686           else
6687             Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(1)
6688                                                        : BI->getSuccessor(0));
6689           BI->eraseFromParent();
6690           if (DTU)
6691             DTU->applyUpdates({{DominatorTree::Delete, Predecessor, BB}});
6692           return true;
6693         }
6694         // TODO: SwitchInst.
6695       }
6696 
6697   return false;
6698 }
6699 
6700 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifyOnceImpl(BasicBlock *BB) {
6701   bool Changed = false;
6702 
6703   assert(BB && BB->getParent() && "Block not embedded in function!");
6704   assert(BB->getTerminator() && "Degenerate basic block encountered!");
6705 
6706   // Remove basic blocks that have no predecessors (except the entry block)...
6707   // or that just have themself as a predecessor.  These are unreachable.
6708   if ((pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) ||
6709       BB->getSinglePredecessor() == BB) {
6710     LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Removing BB: \n" << *BB);
6711     DeleteDeadBlock(BB, DTU);
6712     return true;
6713   }
6714 
6715   // Check to see if we can constant propagate this terminator instruction
6716   // away...
6717   Changed |= ConstantFoldTerminator(BB, /*DeleteDeadConditions=*/true,
6718                                     /*TLI=*/nullptr, DTU);
6719 
6720   // Check for and eliminate duplicate PHI nodes in this block.
6721   Changed |= EliminateDuplicatePHINodes(BB);
6722 
6723   // Check for and remove branches that will always cause undefined behavior.
6724   Changed |= removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BB, DTU);
6725 
6726   // Merge basic blocks into their predecessor if there is only one distinct
6727   // pred, and if there is only one distinct successor of the predecessor, and
6728   // if there are no PHI nodes.
6729   if (MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB, DTU))
6730     return true;
6731 
6732   if (SinkCommon && Options.SinkCommonInsts)
6733     if (SinkCommonCodeFromPredecessors(BB, DTU)) {
6734       // SinkCommonCodeFromPredecessors() does not automatically CSE PHI's,
6735       // so we may now how duplicate PHI's.
6736       // Let's rerun EliminateDuplicatePHINodes() first,
6737       // before FoldTwoEntryPHINode() potentially converts them into select's,
6738       // after which we'd need a whole EarlyCSE pass run to cleanup them.
6739       return true;
6740     }
6741 
6742   IRBuilder<> Builder(BB);
6743 
6744   if (Options.FoldTwoEntryPHINode) {
6745     // If there is a trivial two-entry PHI node in this basic block, and we can
6746     // eliminate it, do so now.
6747     if (auto *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin()))
6748       if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 2)
6749         Changed |= FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PN, TTI, DTU, DL);
6750   }
6751 
6752   Instruction *Terminator = BB->getTerminator();
6753   Builder.SetInsertPoint(Terminator);
6754   switch (Terminator->getOpcode()) {
6755   case Instruction::Br:
6756     Changed |= simplifyBranch(cast<BranchInst>(Terminator), Builder);
6757     break;
6758   case Instruction::Ret:
6759     Changed |= simplifyReturn(cast<ReturnInst>(Terminator), Builder);
6760     break;
6761   case Instruction::Resume:
6762     Changed |= simplifyResume(cast<ResumeInst>(Terminator), Builder);
6763     break;
6764   case Instruction::CleanupRet:
6765     Changed |= simplifyCleanupReturn(cast<CleanupReturnInst>(Terminator));
6766     break;
6767   case Instruction::Switch:
6768     Changed |= simplifySwitch(cast<SwitchInst>(Terminator), Builder);
6769     break;
6770   case Instruction::Unreachable:
6771     Changed |= simplifyUnreachable(cast<UnreachableInst>(Terminator));
6772     break;
6773   case Instruction::IndirectBr:
6774     Changed |= simplifyIndirectBr(cast<IndirectBrInst>(Terminator));
6775     break;
6776   }
6777 
6778   return Changed;
6779 }
6780 
6781 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifyOnce(BasicBlock *BB) {
6782   bool Changed = simplifyOnceImpl(BB);
6783 
6784   return Changed;
6785 }
6786 
6787 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::run(BasicBlock *BB) {
6788   bool Changed = false;
6789 
6790   // Repeated simplify BB as long as resimplification is requested.
6791   do {
6792     Resimplify = false;
6793 
6794     // Perform one round of simplifcation. Resimplify flag will be set if
6795     // another iteration is requested.
6796     Changed |= simplifyOnce(BB);
6797   } while (Resimplify);
6798 
6799   return Changed;
6800 }
6801 
6802 bool llvm::simplifyCFG(BasicBlock *BB, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
6803                        DomTreeUpdater *DTU, const SimplifyCFGOptions &Options,
6804                        ArrayRef<WeakVH> LoopHeaders) {
6805   return SimplifyCFGOpt(TTI, DTU, BB->getModule()->getDataLayout(), LoopHeaders,
6806                         Options)
6807       .run(BB);
6808 }
6809